D:\Lasag Cd자료\Laser Sources Release 0102-60020 (T)\Integrator\860651 Dok En

$Page 1: D:\Lasag Cd자료\Laser Sources Release 0102-60020 (T)\Integrator\860651 Dok En$
Laser LightWare™

Release 0101 Sept 08

FLS/KLS/SLSseries of lasersSwiss quality pulsed Nd:YAG Lasers of up to 1000 W

Integration Instructions with NLS

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S

Integration Instructions Laser Sources with NLS

Lasag AG, Thun, 10.01.08 CM 86 . 0651 - 00 - 01

Integration Instructions Laser Sources with NLS The Installation Instructions presented here serve the authorized personnel as a instruction- and working tool for the electrical integration of the laser sources into a processing installation with NLS and for the setting up of such an installation to suit the laser.

The Integration Instructions are part of the three volume user documentation.

!

DANGER For your own safety Before you carry out any work on or - with the LASAG laser sources, you must absolutely read the chapter of the Safety Information in the Operater Instructions as well as the chapters corresponding to the respective activities.

Product Identification

These Integration Instructions are applicable to the following laser sources:

KLS 246 all types

SLS 200 all types

FLS all types

SLAB N

NA N all types

These integration instructions are updated for the laser control NLS V80.

Switzerland LASAG AG • C.F.L. Lohnerstrasse 24 • CH-3602 Thun • Switzerland Phone +41-33-227 4545 • Fax +41-33-227 4573 • [email protected] • www.lasag.com

USA LASAG Industrial-Lasers • A Division of the SWATCH Group (US) Inc. 1615 Barclay Boulevard • Buffalo Grove, IL 60089 • U.S.A. Phone +1-847-483 6300 • Fax +1-847-483 6333 • [email protected]

Germany LASAG Industrial-Lasers • A Division of the SWATCH Group (Deutschland) GmbH Hohenzollernstrasse 16 • D-75177 Pforzheim • Germany Phone +49-7231-3872 670 • Fax +49-7231-3872 679 • [email protected]

Italy LASAG Industrial-Lasers • A Division of LASCOR S.p.A. Via Piave 98 • IT-21018 Sesto Calende • Italy Phone +39-0331-924 881 • Fax +39-0331-919 384 • [email protected]

Japan LASAG Industrial-Lasers • A Division of the SWATCH Group (Japan) KK Nippon Express BILT-1, 5F • Baraki, 2526-23, Ichikawa-shi, Chiba, 272-0004 • Japan Phone +81-47-329 7099 • Fax +81-47-328 3590 • [email protected]

A COMPANY OF THE


Integration Instructions Laser Sources with NLS

Lasag AG, Thun, 10.01.08 CM 86 . 0651 - 00 - 02

Table of contents

Chapter 1 Introduction and additional Safety Notices 86.0651-01

Chapter 2 Laser Materials Processing 86.0651-02

Chapter 3 Start-up and further Life cycles 86.0651-03

Chapter 4 Setting-up a Processing Installation 86.0651-04

Chapter 5 System Interfaces 86.0651-05

Chapter 6 USER Interfaces X51 and X52 86.0651-06

Chapter 7 Setting-up and Settings of the Laser Control System 86.0651-07

Chapter 8 Terminals and Modem Operation 86.0651-08

Chapter 9 Schematic Diagrams Mains Connection and User Interfaces 86.0651-09

Chapter 10 Schematic Diagrams Accessories and Terminals 86.0651-10


A COMPANY OF THE

© Lasag AG, Thun, 10.01.08 CM

Integration instructionsLaser sources with NLS

1 Introduction and additional safety notices

86 . 0651 - 01 - 01


Table of contents

1.1 Foreword 21.1.1 Documentation overview 21.1.2 Exemption from liability 21.1.3 Copyright 2

1.2 Authorised persons 31.2.1 Personnel qualification for setting up a processing unit 31.2.2 Personnel qualification for the integration procedure 31.2.3 Personnel qualification for making the connection to the mains 31.2.4 Personnel qualification for individual chapters 31.2.5 Training 3

1.3 Additional safety notices 3

1.4 Danger signs and labels for processing systems and processing dangers 4

1.5 Statutory regulations governing integration work 4

1.6 Brief instruction on the integration of LASAG lasers 51.6.1 Overview 51.6.2 Space requirement 61.6.3 Heat dissipation 71.6.4 Mains power connection 91.6.5 Process gases and extraction 101.6.6 Personal safety 101.6.7 Drive 121.6.8 Operation 151.6.9 Customer services 16


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 02

1.1 Foreword

1.1.1 Documentation overview

The user documentation consists of the following three volumes:

Operator instructions

The operator instructions are to be used by the user staff as a training and working aid for the safe and appropriate operation and maintenance of LASAG laser sources.

Integration instructions

The integration instructions are to be used by the integration staff as a training and working aid for

- creating the customer-based installations for commissioning the laser source- the electrical integration of the laser sources with NLS into a processing unit- the laser-based installation of a processing unit- the safe handling of the laser source in the other life-cycle phases

Service instructions

The service instructions describe to the service personnel the safe implementation of the commissioning procedure and maintenance plan, the safe repair if faults should occur, and gives details of spare parts.

Customer-specific documents and updates relating to all instructions are contained in chapter 9 of the Operator instructions.

1.1.2 Exemption from liability

LASAG AG is not liable for any faults in this documentation. Liability for direct and indirect damage arising from the delivery or use of this documentation is excluded provided this is legally permissible.

1.1.3 Copyright

Reprinting this document, including extracts of it, is prohibited. No part of this document may be re-produced in any form, or processed, duplicated or distributed by any means - electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise - without the written permission of LASAG AG. All rights reserved, especially the right of duplication and translation, and the patent or registration rights.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 03

1.2 Authorised persons

1.2.1 Personnel qualification for setting up a processing unit

In terms of instructions and assessment, the setting up of a laser unit requires a person with experience in this work who must have successfully completed a course for laser safety advisers recognised by the authorities.

1.2.2 Personnel qualification for the integration procedure

These activities may be carried out only by professional technical staff of this discipline or by staff pos-sessing the equivalent mechanical and electrical knowledge. The acceptance testing of the work relating to safety functions and to compliance with the relevant standards must be done by a member of the technical staff trained for this.

1.2.3 Personnel qualification for making the connection to the mains

Personnel who make the mains connection require an authorization in accordance with state regulations.

1.2.4 Personnel qualification for individual chapters

Additional personnel qualifications are also required for individual chapters.

1.2.5 Training

The manufacturer's customer service shall be pleased to provide information on training courses.

1.3 Additional safety noticesDANGER

Electric shockDuring all work on parts of electrical systems, the mains supply is to be disconnected from all terminals on the customer side and to be locked with a padlock. Parts of electrical systems are to short-circuited with the grounding connector before they are touched.

DANGER

Reduced safety if cables are damagedLay cables for safety circuits and warning lamps in such a way as to protect them against all types of damage. Warning lamps must be redundant (several of them) or fail-safe.

CAUTION

Risk of tripping with badly laid cables.Lay cables away from walking and rest areas.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 04

1.4 Danger signs and labels for processing systems and processing dangers

Danger signs and labels for the processing systems will be installed by the integrator.

Danger signs and labels for the processing systems will be installed by the operator.

1.5 Statutory regulations governing integration work

Laser standard EN 60825-1:1994 applies in general, and it also contains important sections for the ope-rators of laser equipment.

Installers and operators of laser processing systems are covered by ISO standards of class 11553: 1996 and EN 12626: 1997.

In addition, the state regulations must be complied with. For instance, in the USA the directive U.S. 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 (FDA) applies to laser equipment. ANSI Z 136.1: 1993 “For the safe use of la-sers” applies in addition to operators.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 05

1.6 Brief instruction on the integration of LASAG lasers

1.6.1 Overview

Sales discussionIntroductionIntegration / Installationof LASAG lasers

Order

• Operator training (1 day)• Service and maintenance (2 days)• Integration / Installation (1 day)• Application training (1-2 days)

Order confirmation• Integration instructions• Commissioning checklist returned to LASAG completed

Installation On receipt of the completed checklist

Commissioning checklist

See chapter 3.1.8

• The IBN checklist ensures that the conditions for commissioning the laser have been met by the desired time (power, water connections, etc.)• 1 completed copy per commissioning location is returned to LASAG• The distribution is adapted to the circumstances on a case by case basis

Example: the distribution if LASAG sells directly to the end customer

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok

BearbeitungOberflächeTherm. Behandlung

Ersetzt durchÄnderungen

Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g

Kanten ohne Angaben0,2-0,3 mm brechen

DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 01 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM

Integrationsanleitung Kapitel 1 Pictures

86.0650 01 05.indd

LASAGEndkunde

FinalCustomer

Checklist

Checklist

1

2


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 06

Overall documentation

Operator instructions• Safety notices, layout and function, menus, operation, error messages, maintenance, customer-specific documents

Integration instructions• Safety notices, laser material processing, commissioning, setup, interfaces, laser control, terminals, schematic diagrams

Service instructions• Safety notices, technical data, WRD, error messages, accessories, adjustments, repair, maintenance, schematic diagrams

1.6.2 Space requirement

FLS Laser

FLS 542CL FLS 1042CL Min. wall clearance:

FLS 342N FLS 642N 100 mm

FLS 352N FLS 652N

FLS 542N FLS 1042N

FLS 552N

1 Aufbau und Dimensionen1 Setup and Dimensions

Laserquelle FLS N/C/CL Laser source FLS N/C/CL

*) mobile Option +25mm

2410

100*

460 1950

150

2015

*

1

1206

* 1410

*

780100

2

3

FLS 542N, 552N, 642N, 652N, 1042N/C/CL

1410

*

1206

*

100*


150

460

1760

1300

100 780

2015

*

2

3

1

Anschlüsse

Netz

Steckerplatte

Kühlwasser

Connections

1 Mains

2 Connector plate

3 Cooling water

FLS 342N, 352N

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S DS: 47-20-05, 90-10-20 Lasag AG, Thun, 18.09.06 CM 86 . 0392 - 01 - 01




2410

100*

460 1950

150

2015

*

1

1206

* 1410

*

780100

2

3

FLS 542N, 552N, 642N, 652N, 1042N/C/CL

1410

*

1206

*

100*


150

460

1760

1300

100 780

2015

*

2

3

1

Anschlüsse

Netz

Steckerplatte

Kühlwasser

Connections

1 Mains

2 Connector plate

3 Cooling water

FLS 342N, 352N

A COMPANY OF THE





2410

100*

460 1950

150

2015

*

1

1206

* 1410

*

780100

2

3

FLS 542N, 552N, 642N, 652N, 1042N/C/CL

1410

*

1206

*

100*


150

460

1760

1300

100 780

2015

*

2

3

1

Anschlüsse

Netz

Steckerplatte

Kühlwasser

Connections

1 Mains

2 Connector plate

3 Cooling water

FLS 342N, 352N

A COMPANY OF THE



A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 0�

KLS and SLS lasers

KLS 246 SLS 200

KLS 246CL SLS 200 CL

Provide access to service hatches:

• keep 0.8 m clear on both sides or• unit can be moved• SLS 200 CL16: Free circulation of air must be provided both from the side (inlet) and from below (outlet).

1.6.3 Heat dissipation

See also chapter 3.1.5

• All laser power supplies are water-cooled, except those for the SLS 200 CL16 and the DLS. They are air-cooled.• An industrial or drinking water supply is required for the water cooling.• The air-cooled devices give off their heat into the surroundings.• The water-cooled devices also give off a little of their heat into the room.• At temperatures below 3°C the lasers cannot be switched because of the risk of frozen cooling water.

The following applies to all devices:

• Ambient temperature (operation) 10...35°C (average over 24 h) max. 40°C• Ambient temperature (storage) 5...40°C• Max. rel. humidity 80%• Max. noise level 65 dBA, at a distance of 1 m (SLS 200 CL16: 70 dBA)

1 Setup and Dimensions

Laserquelle KLS 246 Laser source KLS 246

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S DS: 47-20-07, 90-10-20 Lasag AG, Thun, 13.03.98 FP 86 . 0392 - 01 - 03


Laserquelle KLS 246 Laser source KLS 246

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S DS: 47-20-07, 90-10-20 Lasag AG, Thun, 13.03.98 FP 86 . 0392 - 01 - 03


A COMPANY OF THE

DS: 47-20-11, 90-10-20


© Lasag AG, Thun, 29.09.06 CM 86 . 0444 - 02 - 10

Laserquelle SLS 200 CL/CL8 Laser source SLS 200 CL/CL8


A COMPANY OF THE

DS: 47-20-11, 90-10-20


© Lasag AG, Thun, 29.09.06 CM 86 . 0444 - 02 - 10

Laserquelle SLS 200 CL/CL8 Laser source SLS 200 CL/CL8


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 08

Heat dissipation into the room

Laser type Max. heat dissipation Max. air intake temperature

SLS 200 CL16 2.5 kW 40°C

Other lasers ≤ 0.4 kW + laser power 40°C

Water connection

The following applies to all water-cooled laser types:

Min. water pressure 4 bar

Max. water pressure 8 bar

Max. water temperature (inlet) 20°C

Min. water temperature (inlet) 10°C

Water qualityDrinking or industrial water

Non-corrosive for non-ferrous metals

Recommended hose size Nominal diameter (ND) 16 mm

Recommendation:• Connect the supplied electrically operated water valve directly to the wall-mounted water connection in order to make a non-pressurised hose connection to the laser.• If the drain line is also pressurised, then it too must be made into a non-pressurised connection by means of a water valve.

The water consumption and heat discharge into the water can be found in the technical data in chapter 2 of the service instructions.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 0�

1.6.4 Mains power connection

See also chapter 3.1.6

• The fuse protection on the customer's premises must be in accordance with the table below.• In order to comply, a safety cut-out switch with characteristic D curve (10..14xIn for max. 0.5..1.5 sec., in accordance with EN 60898) is recommended.• In the event of failure of the safety cut-out all 3 phases must be disconnected from the mains simultaneously (all-phase switch-off)• For optimum personal safety, the installation of a residual current circuit breaker with a sensitivity of 300 mA is recommended on the customer's premises. • The laser power supplies for the FLS series and the SLS 200 CL16 are suitable for connection to 50 Hz and 60 Hz mains power supplies.• The laser power supplies of the KLS 246, SLS 200 and SLS 200CL series (except CL16) can be supplied either for 50 Hz or 60 Hz mains power supplies.

Rated power, power consumption and fuse protection can be found in the technical data in Chapter 2 of the service instructions.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 10

1.6.5 Process gases and extraction

See also chapter 2

Process gases

Process gases are frequently used to achieve optimum processing.

Process Gases Pressure Consumption

Drilling O2, N2, Air 6-15 bar 50-100 l/min

Cutting O2, N2, Air 2-20 bar 20-150 l/min

Welding Ar, H2, He 1-4 bar 10-30 l/min

Extraction

• Some toxic by-products are produced by the working process (vapours, smoke, ash, gases).• It is recommended that a suitable extraction unit with appropriate filters (fine dust, active carbon) is

installed. • In all cases the local regulations (maximum allowable concentrations, MAC list) must be complied

with.

1.6.6 Personal safety

See also chapters 4 and 5

Basic diagram showing the Emergency-off link between laser and processing machine.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 01 02

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 01 10.indd

Not-Aus/E-Stop

Safety-Relay

Not-Aus/E-Stop

Safety-Relay

MaschineMachine

Laser

X50


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 11

Class 1 laser (default “normal case”):

Processing room enclosedOperating hatch secured with interlock switchOperators not exposed to any laser radiation

Class 4 laser (allowed only as an exception):

work room secured against unauthorized access with interlock switch Operators can be exposed to direct laser radiation or unwanted radiation and must wear protective clothing.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 01 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 01 11.indd

Bedienungsöffnung mit InterlaockschalterOperation door with Interlock-switch

Bearbeitungsraum laserdichtWorking room laserproof

YX

Zugangstür mit InterlockschalterEntrance door with Interlock-switch

Raum laserdicht, Bedienpersonal mit SchutzkleidungRoom laserproof, operating personnel with protection clothes

YX

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 01 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 01 11.indd

Bedienungsöffnung mit InterlaockschalterOperation door with Interlock-switch

Bearbeitungsraum laserdichtWorking room laserproof

YX

Zugangstür mit InterlockschalterEntrance door with Interlock-switch

Raum laserdicht, Bedienpersonal mit SchutzkleidungRoom laserproof, operating personnel with protection clothes

YX


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 12

1.6.� Drive

See chapter 6

Parallel interfaces USER1...8

• The laser can be remote-controlled via the USER interfaces using standard 24V interfaces.• Ideal for controlling SPS control systems.• The USER1 interface on plug X51 is fitted as standard to every laser.• Other interfaces are optional.• Some options require a 2-board NLS.

USER1, standard, 1-board NLS adequate

Signal description Designation

1 Action group request and acknowledge signal. The action groups must not be occupied by a terminal if the USER interfaces are to be used to control the system.

RC, RCA

2 Laser clock signals switch over to external laser clock and input for external trigger pulse. Stop signal to block laser pulses.Stop signal to block laser pulses.

RF, TP

HLFP, WP

3 Driving the beam shutter, opens and closes the beam shutter with acknowledge signal.

SOC, SO

4 Triggering a series of pulses corresponds to the number of pulses contained in the WPS.

PB

5 Ramping triggers a continuous transition to the ramping pulse width or goes back to the normal pulse width.

PR

6 Gas valve opens and closes the gas valve in the processing head.

GVALV

7 Choosing recipes 1 – 3 choice of other recipes with USER 3B.

LP0, LP1

8 Selection of fiber optic cable statuses 0 - 3 provided a corresponding time sharing configuration was selected for the fiber-optic cables. Choice of other fiber-optic cable statuses with USER 3B. Acknowledge signal that the status has been achieved.

LL0, LL1, FINP1

9 Output to indicate laser status. The signal can be configured with an integrator parameter in accordance with requirements.

OK

USER 2A, optional, 2-board NLS required

• USER2 is the parallel interface for CNC or SPS for transmitting laser parameters to the laser control system and also for the WPS and all recipes.• The ST and TSS protocols are supported.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 13

USER 3B, optional, 2-board NLS required


1 Choice of recipes 4 - 15, in addition to recipes 1 - 3 that can even be selected with signals on USER1.

LP2, LP3

2 Selection of the fiber-optic cable statuses 5 - 8 in addition tofiber-optic cable statuses 1 – 4, that can even be selected with signals on USER1.

LL2

3 Input for switching off the laser. In the event of external error conditions, e.g. in the CNC, the laser can be switched off.

LOFF

4 Output to indicate laser status. This output is in addition to the OK output and can also be configured to be the same.

LSTAT0

USER 4A, optional, no 2-board NLS required, combination with USER 3B required.

• The two interfaces USER 3B and USER 4A give improved integration of the laser into a higher-order machine.

• They allow the laser to be powered up or down via the SPS, without having to execute manual func-tions or checks on the laser.

• The interlock key switch has a third position to allow it to switch over to local function if maintenance work is required.

• In addition, there is also a message contact at the mushroom-shaped emergency-off button.

USER 5A, optional, 2-board NLS required

• This option provides a second opener contact at the mushroom-shaped emergency-off button.

(For those users who do not need the other functions of USER 4A).

USER 6A, multiple workstations, optional, 2-board NLS not required

• This interface provides the interlock and fiber-shutter signals that are needed when work is to be done independently of one another with several fibers at several workstations.

• In this case, a workstation manager is required to ensure synchronisation of the individual worksta-tions with the laser.

• This workstation manager is not part of the accessories supplied by LASAG lasers and must be cre-ated by the integrator himself

USER �A/8A, fast shutter, optional, 2-board NLS not required

• To drive the fast shutter, the two options of USER 7A (fast shutter only in the area of the interface plug) and USER 8A (fast shutter and signals of USER 4A in the area A of the interface plug) are available.

• Attention: the drive of the fast shutter is not controlled by the laser control system, which is why the integrator himself has to take care of the synchronisation between laser beam and fast shutter movement.

• Key words: do not shoot onto the moving shutter, do not exceed the maximum closing time.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 14

Pin assignment of options X52 and X53, max. number of plugs

• The USER1 interface on plug X51 is fitted as standard to every laser.• The other optional interfaces are routed to the reserve plugs X52 and X53.• Every plug has space for a signal group A and a signal group B.• The signal groups can be combined as required.• The number of plugs is limited.• KLS 246 and SLS 200 have only one spare space, whereas the FLS N have two spare spaces.• It should be noted that the option of an external operating panel (X54 OEM) requires a plug of this

type.• The maximal possible number of plugs has to be checked all the time.

X 50 SYSTEM, standard interface for safety requirements


1 Connection for the processing room's interlock switch. Opener and closer

2 Connection of emergency-off contacts, in order to be able, for example, to switch off the laser with the handling Emer-gency-off push-button.

Opener and closer

3 Connection to two free contacts of the laser Emergency-off button in order to be able, for example, to switch off the laser with the handling Emer-gency-off push-button.

Opener and closer

4 Potential-free contact for switching the cooling system. It can be used to switch the external cooling water and an external cooler.

5 Outputs for additional displays. Laser warning lamp, beam blocking lamp, laser-on lamp.

X54 OEM, optional external operating panel

• With this option, the operating panel on the laser is dropped and is installed externally via this inter-face, e.g. on the machine operating panel.

• The main switch remains on the laser, the mushroom-shaped Emergency-off button must be installed at a suitable spot by the customer.

• It is recommended that the USER 4 interface (optional) is used to remotely switch on the laser.

COM1/2/3/4 serial interfaces

• The laser is operated and remotely controlled via the serial interfaces.• Extensive access facilities to the internal system variables (for diagnostic purposes) are possible.• For this reason, the serial interfaces are suitable primarily for connection of the LASAG operating

terminals and also for the remote diagnostics via modems.• Two interfaces, COM1 and COM2, are available as standard, with COM2 normally being occupied by

an operating terminal.• Two more interfaces, COM3 and COM4, are available as an option.• A 24V power supply for the terminals is available on plug X61.• The interfaces are PC compatible.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 15

Operating devices

The following devices are available for operating LASAG lasers:

• Hand-held operating device HT2 Enables access to all parameters and infor-

mation. It is not possible to change the shape of a

laser pulse. But its length and intensity can be changed.

1.6.8 Operation

• Built-in terminal ET1 Suitable only for VCPS power supplies (no

RTPS power supplies). Enables access to all parameters and infor-

mation of a VCPS power supply.

• Built-in terminal ET2 (under development) Enables access to all parameters and infor-

mation of all laser types. It is also possible to change without restriction the pulse shape in RTPS power supplies.

Operating program PCT1 Runs on a PC using Windows 95 and higher. (at least 1 serial I/F). Same range of functions

and operating interface as ET1.

Operating program PCT2 Runs on a PC using Windows 95 and higher. (at least Pentium 200 MHz, 1 serial I/F). Same

range of functions and operating interface as ET2. In addition, a link to the LASAG applica-tion database is possible.

User groups / Passwords

• It is possible with every operating device to define proprietary passwords for different user groups (e.g. operator, expert, service engineer, etc.) and to specifically direct their competencies in this way.

• This means that an operator without sufficient knowledge can be prevented from making illegal changes to the manufacturing process.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 01 - 16

1.6.� Customer services

Parts subject to wear and service parts

Parts subject to wear (wear parts)Flash lampsProtective gogglesDeionised water

Spare parts Spare Parts and Accessories chapter 7 of the service instructions

Tool set(supplied with every laser) The special tools required for maintenance

Recommendation: keep a suitable quantity of spare parts in stock.

Stipulated maintenance work

1 shift per day several shifts per day

Maintenance plan for operatorsBy customer personnel(in accordance with chapter 7 of the opera-tor instructions)

DailyMonthly,Every 6 months

At shift changeWeeklyMonthly,

Maintenance plan for service personnelBy Lasag personnel or trained customer personnel(in accordance with chapter 8 of the service instructions)

Annually Every 6 months

Additional services on the part of the customer service department

Maintenance contracts Recommendation:1 service/maintenance per shift and yearCan be adapted to customer wishes

Extended warranty Example:“Europa Integral”24 months, excluding wear parts and optical com-ponents (laser rod, mirrors, lenses, beam expanders)


A COMPANY OF THE



2 Laser material processing

86 . 0651 - 02 - 01


This chapter contains a short introduction to laser fine processing with LASAG lasers and typical settings for some examples.

Table of contents

2.1 Safety notices 2

2.2 Lasers in material processing 2

2.3 Rules for laser beam parameters and beam quality 2

2.4 Fiber technology and robotics 3

2.5 Laser material processing: typical parameters 4

2.6 Laser drilling: typical parameters 42.6.1 Drilling parameters and suitable material 52.6.2 Drilling: function of LASAG lasers (including percussion) 5

2.7 Laser material processing: cutting with Nd:YAG pulses 62.7.1 Laser cutting: typical parameters 72.7.2 Laser material processing: cutting - laser parameter relationship 72.7.3 Cutting: influence of gas and gas quality 82.7.4 Cutting steel with KLS / FLS models 9

2.8 Laser material processing: Welding 102.8.1 Laser welding: typical parameters 112.8.2 Laser welding: influence of the gas 112.8.3 Welding: joint geometries 122.8.4 Welding: wire geometries 132.8.4 Welding: weldability of similar materials 142.8.6 Welding: weldability of dissimilar materials 15


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 02

2.1 Safety notices

DANGER

Take note of the composition of the material!Certain reaction products are hazardous to health. Comply with the maximum allow-able concentrations (MAC) and take precautionary measures, e.g. extraction, breathing masks, etc. Certain materials explode or burn in the presence of oxygen.

2.2 Lasers in material processing

Laser source Typical applications

CO2Cutting, welding, abrading, marking, scribingof: metals. glass, ceramics, plastics

ExcimerMicro-abrading, cutting, drilling of: ceramics, semi-conductors, organic materials

Diode laser Hardening, soldering, welding of metals, plastics

Pulsed Nd:YAG(Micro-) cutting, drilling, welding, marking, abradingof: metals, ceramics, semi-conductors, crystals

cw-Nd:YAG Cutting, welding of metals

In combination with beam guide/forming, CNC, robots

2.3 Rules for laser beam parameters and beam quality

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 02.indd

2W(Zo) 2Wo

Zo Zi ZRF

Qf

2Wf

f ∠f


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 03

What to do when one of the following is required?• big working distance and small spot (Longer lens, bigger beam expansion “better resonator”)

• Fewer harder positioning tolerances (Longer lens, smaller beam expansion)

= focal length of lens (mm) also working distance

Achievable spot diameter:wf = (4λ/π) M2 F

wf = focal spot diameter (mm) Focal depth

F = speed (f / diameter on lens)

zR = (4λ/π)M2 F2

Process parameters depend on

Θ = beam divergence (mrad) Spot diameter wf :

Θw0 = M2 4λ/π = beam product Threshold (pulse power/wf)Tolerances (focal depth)Productivity

Rule: spot diameter can be reduced by reducing the focal length or by increasing the beam expansion.

M2 can be improved by smaller apertures, curved mirrors and longer resonators.

2.4 Fiber technology and robotics

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 02

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 03.indd

YAG Laser

ΘF

Benefits:

Safety:protected beam/environment

Beam guidance:flexible beam guidance to workpiecetime/energy sharing

Typical parameters:Energy: 0..100 JAverage power: 0 - 10 kWMaximum power: 0 - 10 kW

Typical parameters:Step or GRIN fiberCore: quartzCore: 50 - 1000 µmExample: 0.11 - 0.22

System reliability:laser and workpiece are decoupled

Application:beam more homogeneousmultiple irradiation:- different position- same position

Coupling conditions into fiber: ΘF < 2 N.A.or: Beam product (mm mrad)< 1/2 N.A Φfiber core

Safety factor necessary since laser spot contains only 86% laser energy


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 04

2.5 Laser material processing: typical parameters

Process Irradiance/time(kW/mm2) / (ms)

DrillingCutting

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

ASAG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Beila

gen,

die

dem

Em

pfän

ger

pers

önlic

h an

vertr

aut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nich

t kop

iert,

ver

viel

fälti

gt, a

uch

niem

als

dritt

en P

erso

nen

mitg

etei

lt od

er z

ugän

glic

h ge

mac

ht w

erde

n.©

LAS

AG A

G, T

hun

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

103 / < 10-1

102 / < 1

WeldingAbw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

10 / < 10

HardeningAlloyingTempering

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

10-1 / < 1010 / < 1102 / 10-3

2.6 Laser drilling: typical parameters

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 04

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

Gas

Material

Plasma

LaserBeam

Laser beam

Wave length (µm)Power (W)Irradiance (W/cm2)Energy (J)Interaction time/pulse duration (ms)Pulse rep. rate (Hz)PolarisationBeam product (mm mrad)Resonator

1.064high 106

depends on geometry0.01-0.5depends on applicationno< 508/07 long, 08/26 long

Optics

Focal length (mm)Spot (mm)Focal depht (in)Defocus (mm)Beam expander

100/500.05-0.40.05-0.16depends on geometry1-8

Gas

Type/purityPressure (1bar= 105Pa)Flow (l/min) / coaxialityDistance nozzle - workpiece (mm)Nozzle shapeNozzle diameter (mm)

O2, N2, air6-1550-100 1cylindrical / conical0.5-3


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 05

2.6.1 Drilling parameters and suitable material

Process boundaries

Laser type Ø (mm) Depth (mm) Metal Ceramics Plastic

CO2 0.1-open 10 good good good

Nd.YAG

Single pulse (µs-pulses) 0.02-1 5 good good poor

Trepanning 0.08-open 5 good good poor

Percussion 0.05-1.4 35 good good poor

Abrading (ns) 0.02-open 0.5 good good good

Nd:YAG (335 nm) 0.01-open 0.5 good good good

2.6.2 Drilling: function of LASAG lasers (including percussion)

KLS 246 FC

SLAB KLS 246-102

FLS 352-307

FLS 552-307

FLS 652-502

Max. depth (mm) 1 4.5 2 8 10 20

Min. Ø (µm) 20 15 20 50 150 250

Max. aspect 1/30 1/70 1/25 1/40 1/20 1/40

Min. Ø (µm) 50 100 200 600 800 1300


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 06

2.7 Laser material processing: cutting with Nd:YAG pulses

Cutting methods (DIN 2310)

Cutting by burning Cutting by melting Cutting by sublimating

Laser delivers ignition energy

Laser delivers melting energy

Laser delivers vaporisation energy

Typical parameters: > 106 W/cm2, < 1 ms > 106 W/cm2, < 0.5 ms > 108 W/cm2, < 0.1 ms

Typical material: steel (1200° C) CrNi steel, Al, brass, Ti, ceramics etc.

ceramics

Process gas: O2 (exothermic reaction) N2, Ar, Air N2

Typical gas pressure: below 6 bar 10-20 bar 0-10 bar

Benefits: highest speedgreatest thickness

oxide-freelittle re-working

limited heat damage

Disadvantages: big heat damageoxidationextended striation

heat damageless fast striation

ejected materiallow speedlimited thickness

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 06

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 06.indd

4

3

2

1

01 2.5 6.3 16 40 Thickness

(mm)

Velocitym/min

sawing autogen

nibbling

Laser400W

Plasma

STEELnon-alloyed


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 07

2.7.1 Laser cutting: typical parameters

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 04

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

Gas

Material

Plasma

LaserBeam

Laser beam

Wave length (µm)Power (W)Irradiance (W/cm2)Energy (J)Interaction time/pulse duration (ms)Pulse rep. rate (Hz)PolarisationBeam product (mm mrad)Resonator

1.064high 106

depends on kerf size0.01-0.5< 100no< 1008/07 long, 08/26 long

Optics


100/500.05-0.40.05-0.16into material1-8

Gas

Type/purityPressure (1 bar= 105Pa)Flow (l/min) / coaxiality Distance nozzle - workpiece (mm)Nozzle shapeNozzle diameter (mm)

O2, N2, air2-2020-1500.5-2cylindrical / conical0.5-1.5

2.7.2 Laser material processing: cutting - laser parameter relationship

Process parameter(s = overlap)Cutting speed (v)Process depth (z)Entrance width of kerf (w)Kerf roughness (Rz)Kerf conicityHeat affected zone (HAZ)

Influence of gas and position of spot not taken into account

Laser parameters(ΦF = laser spot, f = pulse rep. rate)~(1-s) ΦF f ~ Pav/ ΦF f ~ΦF A(P) (A=aspect ratio:e.g 20 metal)~ΦF ~ΦF /2) - (s ΦF /2 - s2/4)1/2

~z/zR ~ zλ/ΦF 2 and~s f e (tpulse, heat conductivity/C)1/2

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 07

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 07.indd

Zs

ø F

R

z

SchnittiefenqualitätQuality of kerf

Wärmebeeinflusste Zone (WEZ)Heat affected zone (HAZ)

Materialstärke (z)Material thickness

Schnittfuge (w)Kerf

KantenrauhigkeitEdge roughness

SchnittrauhigkeitKerf roughness

v

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 07

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 07.indd

Zs

ø F

R

z

SchnittiefenqualitätQuality of kerf

Wärmebeeinflusste Zone (WEZ)Heat affected zone (HAZ)

Materialstärke (z)Material thickness

Schnittfuge (w)Kerf

KantenrauhigkeitEdge roughness

SchnittrauhigkeitKerf roughness

v


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 08

2.7.3 Cutting: influence of gas and gas quality

Requirements of gas supply system

Sources of contamination must be avoided:

Contamination of Ar (length 1 m, Ø 6 mm) flow 5 l/min (Guedel, Techpress 1(98)MylarMylar 0.2 ppmNylon-6 0.05Perbunan 5.3Teflon 11PVC 27Steel 0Cu 0

Influence on striation and recast

4 mm steel: speed with O2 purity

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 08

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 08.indd

Ang

le o

f em

ersi

on a

t exi

t

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

Aus

tritt

swin

kel

a[°

]

Vorschub v 2 [mm/min]

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

2900

3000

speed

Gasreinheit / % O 2

Vor

schu

b v

2/ m

m-m

in-1

3300

3100

29002700

2500

2300

2100

1900

17001500

99.4

00

99.5

00

99.6

00

99.7

00

99.8

00

99.9

00

100.

000

Purity of gas

spee

d

Serie 1 99.500%Serie 3 99.650%Serie 5 99.700%Serie 7 99.750%

Serie 9 99.850%

Serie 11 99.950%Linear (Toleranz plus 2°)

Serie 2 99.600%

Serie 4 99.675%Serie 6 99.725%Serie 8 99.800%

Serie 10 99.900%Linear (Mittelwert)Linear (Toleranz minus 2°)

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 08

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 08.indd

Ang

le o

f em

ersi

on a

t exi

t

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

Aus

tritt

swin

kel

a[°

]

Vorschub v 2 [mm/min]

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2600

2700

2800

2900

3000

speed

Gasreinheit / % O 2

Vor

schu

b v

2/ m

m-m

in-1

3300

3100

29002700

2500

2300

2100

1900

17001500

99.4

00

99.5

00

99.6

00

99.7

00

99.8

00

99.9

00

100.

000

Purity of gas

spee

d

Serie 1 99.500%Serie 3 99.650%Serie 5 99.700%Serie 7 99.750%

Serie 9 99.850%

Serie 11 99.950%Linear (Toleranz plus 2°)

Serie 2 99.600%

Serie 4 99.675%Serie 6 99.725%Serie 8 99.800%

Serie 10 99.900%Linear (Mittelwert)Linear (Toleranz minus 2°)


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 0�

2.7.4 Cutting steel with KLS / FLS models

Model KLS 246-102 FLS 342-302 FLS 352-302 FLS 552-302 KLS 246 FC 040

Spot (mm) 0.05-0.15 0.1-0.25 0.1-0.3 0.1-0.3 0.02-0.05

Average power (W)

120 300 300 400 10

Pulse power (kW) 7 5 20 20 0.6

Frequency (Hz) 1000 1000 1000 1000 5000

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 09

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 09.indd

Dicke (mm)Thickness

5 10

4000

Geschwindigkeit (mm/min)Speed

KLS

246FC

040

KLS246-102

FLS352-302FLS552-302


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 10

2.8 Laser material processing: Welding

Conductivity welding Deep welding

HAZ extended smaller

Deformation extended smaller

Irradiance (MW/cm2) < 1 (> 1 for highly reflective material

> 1

Aspect 1-1.5 1-5

Material loss no low

Efficiency reasonable better

Depth up to 0.5 mm up to 3 mm

Rule of thumb depth = 0.1 mm x pulse length (ms) (steel); non-ferrous metals: use shorter pulses

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 10

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 10.indd

ArbeitsgasWorking gas

SchweissdüseWeld nozzle

LaserstrahlLaser beam




WerkstückWorkpiece

DampfkanalSteam channel

PlasmawolkePlasma cloud

SchweissnahtWeld seam

SchweissbadWeld pool



Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 10

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 10.indd







WerkstückWorkpiece

DampfkanalSteam channel

PlasmawolkePlasma cloud






A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 11

2.8.1 Laser welding: typical parameters

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 04

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 04.indd

Gas

Material

Plasma

LaserBeam

Laser beam

Wave length (µm)Power (W) (conductivity/deep welding)Irradiance (W/cm2)Energy (J)Interaction time/pulse duration (ms)Pulse rep. rate (Hz)PolarisationBeam product (mm mrad)Resonator

1.064medium/high 104

depends on geometry1.20depends on applicationno< 1008/07 short/long

Optics


100/500.1-0.70.05-0.16above workpiece1-3

Gas

Type/purityPressure (1bar= 105Pa)Flow (l/min) / coaxiality Distance nozzle - workpiece (mm)Nozzle shapeNozzle diameter (mm)

Ar, N2, He/high1-410-30 4cylindrical / conical 4

2.8.2 Laser welding: influence of the gas

Influence of gas on weld quality

- protection of weld- reduction/change of plasma density- change of surface tension, dynamics and reaction of weld (surface)

Advantages of He: good protection against oxidation (CrNi-steel, Ti (alloys), Al, good control of plasma (high ionisation energy, homogeneous weld even at high energy).

Disadvantages of He: costs

Advantages of Ar: good protection against oxidation (CrNi-steel, Ni alloys, Ti alloys), reasonable costs.

Disadvantages of Ar: good adjustment required due to narrow nozzles/high flow, otherwise weld is unquiet and has cracks, deep welding more difficult due to plasma absorp-tion.

Advantages of N2 good weld depth at high speed, cost effective

Disadvantages of N2 unquiet surface (worse than with Ar)

Advantages of CO2 quiet surface, good results with non-critical materials with less C, S content

Disadvantages of CO2 not suitable for CrNi-steel and Ti (alloys)

Note for deep welding of Al (alloys) a mixture of He/N2 is recommended since weld-ing can be done to a greater depth and to a higher quality.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 12

2.8.3 Welding: joint geometries

Lap weld Seam preparation:

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 11

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12

D1

D2

D1

D

DD

D c

ab

c

a

b

D

D

H

D

1

2

Geometry• sharp edges• perpendicular to surface parallel to seam• roughness < max. joint kerf width

Butt weld

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 11

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12

D1

D2

D1

D

DD

D c

ab

c

a

b

D

D

H

D

1

2

Kerf width• Tolerances without add. materialthickness (D) Kerf width offset<0.02 in 0.05xD 0.15xD<3 mm 0.03xD 0.1xD

Fillet weld Surface preparation

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 11

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12

D1

D2

D1

D

DD

D c

ab

c

a

b

D

D

H

D

1

2

• free of oil, grease, dirt• no surface layer (coating, colour varnish, elox, etc.)


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 13

2.8.4 Welding: wire geometries

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

Draht

Rule: wire should be surrounded by molten connecting materialSandwich technique: folded connecting element or cover

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

Draht

Wire in slit or hole

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

Draht

Wire in flap or squeezed tube

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 02 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 02 12.indd

Draht Line contacts should be avoided


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 14

2.8.4 Welding: weldability of similar materials

Al

Be

Cd

Cr

Co

Cu

Au

Fe Pb

Mg

Mn

Mo

Ni

Pa

Pt

Ag

Ta Sn

Ti W Va Zn

Zr

Aluminium Argon gas, cracks and pores with Al-alloys (improvement with pulse forming and and cw laser)

Beryllium hazardous vapours

CadmiumChromiumCobaltCopper narrow application window (high energy, risk of sputtering, clean surface)

Gold narrow application window risk of sputtering

IronLeadMagnesiumManganese Argon gas protection

Molybdenum micro-cracks (improvement by pulse) (forming and cw laser)

Nickel good penetration

PalladiumPlatinumSilverTantalum tile weld, gas protection

TinTitanium ductile weld, argon gas protection

Tungsten porous weld (high melting temperature and good conductivity)

VanadiumZincZircon ductile weld, gas protection

good acceptable bad no information


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 02 - 15

2.8.6 Welding: weldability of dissimilar materials

Al

Be

Cd

Cr

Co

Cu

Au

Fe Pb

Mg

Mn

Mo

Ni

Pa

Pt

Ag

Ta Sn

Ti W Va Zn

Zr

Aluminium B B B A A A A B A B A B B A B B A B A

Beryllium B A A A A B B A A B B B B B B B

Cadmium B B B A B B A A A A G B B B B

Chromium G B A VG B B VG G G G B B B G VG G B A

Cobalt A B VG B B A VG VG VG B B B A A A A A

Copper VG A B A B VG VG VG A B B A B G

Gold A B A B VG VG VG VG B A A A A

Iron B B G G G G B A B A A A A

Lead B B B B B B B B B B B B

Magnesium B B B B A B B B B B

Manganese G A A B B A

Molybdenum A A G G B VG B VG VG G B G

Nickel VG VG B G B A A G A A

Palladium A VG VG G A A A G A A

Platinum A A A A G A B A

Silver B B A A B B G B

Tantalum VG VG B B G

Tin B A B B B B

Titanium A A A

Tungsten G VG G A

VanadiumZincZircon

G good A acceptable B bad VG very good


A COMPANY OF THE



3 Commissioning and other life cycles

86 . 0651 - 03 - 01


This chapter describes to the operator the preparations for commissioning and the continuing life cycles of LASAG laser sources.

Table of contents

3.1 Preparations by the operator for commissioning 23.1.1 Safety notices 23.1.2 Checking transport packaging and accessories 23.1.3 Unpacking and installing the laser source 23.1.4 Fitting the KLS and FLS optical system 33.1.5 Connecting the cooling system 43.1.6 Connecting to the mains power supply 43.1.7 Process gases and extraction 63.1.8 Commissioning checklist 7

3.2 Shutting down, taking out of operation, storage 83.2.1 Personnel qualification 83.2.2 Safety notices 83.2.3 Shutting down 83.2.4 Taking out of operation 9

3.3 Packaging, transportation 123.3.1 Personnel qualification 123.3.2 Safety notices 123.3.3 In-house transportation 123.3.4 Packaging, out-of-house transportation 12

3.4 Disposal 133.4.1 Personnel qualification 133.4.2 Safety notices 133.4.3 Disposal of operating equipment 133.4.3 Disposal of subassemblies 143.4.5 Advice notes 14


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 02

3.1 Preparations by the operator for commissioning

3.1.1 Safety notices

DANGER

Commissioning only by service personnel!The preparations for commissioning are described here. Only service personnel as de-scribed in chapter 8 of the service instructions can undertake the actual commissioning.

3.1.2 Checking transport packaging and accessories

On delivery, the packaging and the attached shock and tilt watches are to be checked. If the packing is damaged and/or one of the control labels has turned red, this must be immediately noted on the haulier’s receipt note and LASAG is to be informed.

The accessories are to be checked against the delivery note. If there are discrepancies, LASAG is to be notified in writing.

3.1.3 Unpacking and installing the laser source

3.1.3.1 Unpacking and installing a KLS

1. Check the condition of the transport crate at the place of operation and record the findings.

2. Open the closing bands.3. Carefully remove the protective cardboard

cover, have the optical system held by an-other person as soon as accessible so that it does not fall down.

4. Remove the optical system and lay it on the machine plinth. Lay out the laser cables.

5. Lift the power supply unit from the pallet with a forklift truck and push it to the correct position.

6. Check all material against the packing list. File the packing list in chapter 10 of the oper-ating instructions.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 03 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 03 02.indd


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 03

3.1.3.2 Unpacking and installing a SLS

1. Check the condition of the transport crate at the place of operation and record the findings.

2. Open the closing bands.3. Carefully remove the protective cardboard

cover, have the optical system4. Lift the power supply unit from the pallet

with a forklift truck and push it to the correct position.

5. Check all material against the packing list. File the packing list in chapter 10 of the of the operating instructions.

3.1.3.3 Unpacking and installing a FLS

1. Open the crates at the place of operation, carefully remove the material and dispose of the crates. Do not open the packages in the crates. Transportation safety devices: the cabinet is bolted to the wooden floor.

2. The packing list is at the very top of crate No. 1. Check the material against this list as far as possible and then file the list in chapter 10 of the operating instructions.

3. Option of a mobile laser source: remove feet and fit rollers. Keep the feet.4. Place the cabinet, local transportation in accordance with chapter 3.3 Packaging, Transportation.

3.1.3.4 Space required

Chapter 2 of the service instructions contains the details on the space requirement and on the installation conditions. Free access to doors and covers must be assured.

3.1.4 Fitting the KLS and FLS optical system

1. Stress-free and horizontal 3-point fitting in accordance with the drawing in chapter 2 of the service instructions.

2. Laying the laser cable. Comment: the laser source is supplied with a laser cables attached to each side.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 03 02

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 03 03.indd


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 04

3.1.5 Connecting the cooling system

The requirements of the cooling system are given in chapter 2 of the service instructions.Details of the electrical connection of the cooling system are given in chapter 5.2 of the same instructions.

1. Make the connection using a hose (internal diameter 16 mm). 2. Provide a valve that can be opened and closed by the laser as part of the installation work (customer

side). If an external cooling device is used, then the following must be complied with: - when the laser is switched on, the external cooling must also be ready for switching on, e.g. by

means of a common, higher-order main switch. - The external cooling system must be switched on and off by the laser cooling system or the sup-

ply line must be controlled by a switched valve. 3. If the connection is made to the drinking water supply, a certified isolating element must be installed.

There is an exception in the case of the FLS N without an internal cooling device. In this case deionised water must be used. The pump pressure and water flow also have to be adjusted to the requirements.

3.1.6 Connecting to the mains power supply

3.1.6.1 General

NOTE

The mains connection must be protected with a line safety switch as part of the installation work at the customer's premises so that all 3 phases are switched off together in the event of overcurrent and / or overvoltage.The stipulated fuse protection rating must not be exceeded.

It is recommended that the laser is connected by a fault current safety switch as part of the installation work on the customer's premises.The ground current amounts to a maximum of 440 mA at 400 V for all lasers.As regards the “OEM” design (external operating panel), the main switch is kept on the device.In the case of an external cooling device it must be ensured that it is ready to be switched on at the same time as the laser source. On this point see chapters 3.1.5 and 5.2.3. All lasers are CE-compatible (safety, mains effects / interference, EMC).

3.1.6.2 Connection diagrams

Refer to drawings Nos. 13.0277-16-01 and 13.0277-16-02 in chapter 9.

3.1.6.3 Mains connection and setting the mains voltage for KLS and SLS

DANGER

Electric shock

1. Havethemainsconnectionmadebytechnicalpersonnelwhoareauthorisedtodosoinaccordancewithnationalregulations.

2. During all work in the mains connection box the mains power supply must be discon-nected at all poles on the customer's premises and locked with a padlock. Before touching any parts of the electrical system, they are to be short-circuited briefly with the grounding connector.

3. Make sure there is no tension on the connection cable in the terminal box and protect the earthed conductor with a fuse.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 05

Starting situation: disconnect all supply lines that may already have been connected.

See also the drawing for help. The numbers in the drawing refer to the following steps.

1. Remove the connection panel cover. To do this, undo the two screws.2. Release the two side covers and remove them.3. Undo the two screws of the operating panel and flip forward as far as it will go. Before this can be done, a safety switch must first be removed (see 3a).4. Remove the connection panel cover. To do this, undo the two screws.5. Attach cable lugs to the connection cable, pull the connection cable in through the screw fitting and tighten the screw fitting. Check the tension relief.6. Connect the earthing cable securely to the earthing point.7. Connect the three phases to the mains filter.8. Check the connection to the transformer in accordance with the mains voltage and set as required To

change the mains voltage, the 3 wires (the three phases) need to be changed over. If in doubt, consult the diagram in chapter 9. If changes have been made: correct the mains voltage on the name plate.

9. Check the fuse protection at the customer's premises in accordance with the requirements in chap-ter 2 of the Service Instructions.

10. Close all openings in the reverse sequence.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 03 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 03 06.indd

4

36

7

5

3a

3

8

3

1


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 06

3.1.6.4 Mains connection and setting the mains voltage for FLS

DANGER

Electric shock

1. Have the mains connection made by technical personnel who are authorised todosoinaccordancewithnationalregulations.

2. During all work in the mains connection box the mains power supply must be discon-nected at all poles on the customer's premises and locked with a padlock.

3. Before touching any parts of the electrical system, they are to be short-circuited briefly with the grounding connector.

3. Make sure there is no tension on the connection cable in the terminal box and protect the earthed conductor with a fuse.

Starting situation: disconnect all supply lines that may already have been connected.

1. Open the cover of the mains connection box.2. Attach cable lugs to the connection cable, pull the connection cable in through the screw fitting and

tighten the screw fitting. Check the tension relief.3. Connect the earthing cable securely to the earthing point.4. Connect the three phases to the mains filter.5. Open door A (left).6. The transformer connections are routed to a terminal strip that can be accessed from the front.

Check and set correctly the connections on this terminal strip in accordance with the mains voltage. To change the mains voltage, the 3 wires (the three phases) need to be changed over. If in doubt, consult the diagrams in chapter 9. If changes have been made: correct the mains voltage on the name plate.

7. Check the fuse protection at the customer's premises in accordance with the requirements in chap-ter 2 of the Service Instructions.

8. Close all openings in the reverse sequence.

3.1.7 Process gases and extraction

Some applications require the use of process gases. The effect of the different gases is described in chapter 2.

An extraction system is usually required to comply with air quality in the laser operating room. The local regulations must be complied with. The extraction system should be installed for commissioning.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 07

3.1.8 Commissioning checklist

The following checklist can be used by the operator to check the preparations for commissioning.

The technical details required for this are given in the order confirmation.

Item To be prepared by customer / system builder: Notes: OK1 Check packaging and accessories:

On delivery, please check the packaging for damage. Check attached shock and tilt watches. If the packing is damaged and/or one of the control labels has turned red, this must be immediately noted on the haulier’s receipt note and LASAG is to be informed. The accessories are to be checked against the delivery note. If there are discrepancies, LASAG AG is to be notified in writing..

Integration instructions Chapters 1.6.2 and 3.1.2

2 Installing the laser power supply / space requirement:there must be free access to doors and covers.


3 Connection to the external water cooling system / chiller:the external water cooling system, if necessary, must be connected to the laser and must be operational.


4 Power connection and fusing:the power connection and the appropriate fuses must be installed and checked by an electrician.


5 Process gas / extraction:you can find which process gases can be used for which applications in chapter 2. Frequently, an extraction system is required for the gases and vapours generated during processing. You can obtain information about the regulations that apply in your country.


6 Laser unit safety equipment:the delivery condition of the laser from LASAG AG corresponds to laser class 4. Attaching safety equipment to the unit is the responsibility of the customer and/or system builder.

Integration instructions Chapter 1.6.6 Chapters 4 and 5

7 Interfaces / communication:the required interfaces must be wired up and connected by the customer or system builder.

Integration instructions Chapter 1.6.6 Chapter 6

8 Providing deionised water:Please make sure that at least 30 litres of deionised water (conductivity < 0.5 µS) are available for the laser’s internal cooling circuit.

Deionised water10 ltr. canLASAG part No. 63.2271

9 Coordinating dates:during commissioning, a person representing the customer and/or system builder must be present who is familiar with the operation of the processing system (handling). In addition, a person with signing powers must also be present in order to confirm the correct commissioning when it is complete.For this reason, we ask you to coordinate and reserve these dates in good time.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 08

3.2 Shutting down, taking out of operation, storage

The manufacturer differentiates between:

- shutting down: longer shut-down period (20 days or more) without the power supply being disconnected and operability being affected.

- Taking out of commission: disconnection of the energy supply, preparation for storage at a location other than the place of operation or preparation for packaging.

The chapter describes to those authorised to do the safe way of shutting down, taking out of operation and storage, as well as the necessary safety checks and maintenance work and re-commissioning.

3.2.1 Personnel qualification

Simple mechanical and electrical knowledge are sufficient for shutting down and taking systems out of operation. The personnel must be trained for this work in accordance with the operator instructions and must be made aware of the existing residual dangers.Personnel who disconnect the electric power supply require an authorization in accordance with national regulations.


NOTE

Shutdown damage can be expected:1 if equipment is stored outside ambient conditions, especially in freezing temperatures.2 if maintenance work is not done in time or not done correctly.

3.2.3 Shutting down

3.2.3.1 Type and duration of the shutting down operation

Shutting down means an interruption to operation that lasts for 20 days at least without the power supply being disconnected and operability being affected.The length of time of the shutdown is not subject to any time limit.

3.2.3.2 Ambient conditions during a shutdown

The same temperature and humidity conditions that apply to operations also apply in this case. If lower temperatures are expected, especially temperatures below freezing, then measures must be taken to drain the cooling system in accordance with chapter 3.2.4 Taking out of operation.

3.2.3.3 Shutting down procedure

The water is to be drained from the laser head in accordance with the description of changing the flash-lamp in the Maintenance chapter.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 03 - 09

3.2.3.4 Maintenance during shutdown

The laser source must be put into operation once per year. When doing so, the maintenance work must be done in accordance with the maintenance plan.

3.2.3.5 Re-commissioning

Wait at least 10 minutes after switching on the main switch before switching on the laser to allow the cool-ing circuit to fill up correctly. Otherwise, the normal switch-on procedure applies.

3.2.4 Taking out of operation

3.2.3.1 Type and duration of the process to take systems out of operation

When taken out of operation, the laser source is disconnected from the energy supply and prepared for packaging or storage at a site other than the place of operation.The length of time systems are out of operation is not subject to any time limit.

3.2.4.2 Ambient conditions of storage after taking out of operation

Temperature range: 5 - 40 °C short-term freezing temperatures are allowed.Humidity range for normal packaging: up to 60%Humidity range for special packaging: up to 80%

3.2.4.3 Procedure

3.2.4.3.1 Disconnecting from the mains power supply

DANGER

Electric shock!1. Have skilled electricians who are trained to carry out this work in accordance

with national regulations disconnect the mains power supply and other electrical connections.

2. Do not carry out any other work until all electrical connections have been broken.

3.2.4.3.2 Work on the optical system

1. If fiber optics are present, remove them and cover the openings.2. Cover the rod aperture on the cavity with adhesive tape, and attach an information sticker to the

cover of the optical system: Rod is covered.3. Removing the optics: coupling lens for fiber-optic cables in LLEK of KOS and HOS (only when being

dispatched).


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651- 03 - 10

3.2.4.3.3 Disconnecting the external cooling water supply and draining the circuit (does not apply to SLS 200 CL16)

1. Close the external water supply.2. Disconnect the hoses from the laser source, including any solenoid valve. Collect water in a basin.3. Temperature control valves: write down the set value of both valves and fully open both valves (direc-

tion -°C = clockwise as far as position 1).4. Blow out residual water with air (max. 0.5 bar if using compressed air).5. Connect hose bridge to both connections.6. Reset both temperature control valves to the previous value.

3.2.4.3.4 Draining the internal cooling water circuit in the KLS, SLS 200 and SLS 200 CL32/CL60

1. Push the short section of hose over the drain cock on the pump and open the drain cock.2. Actuate the bleed valve on the cavity and drain the hoses and tank. 1 cm of water left in the tank is admissible.3. Drain the deionising cartridge by loosening the supply hose above the pump. Re-fit the hose.

3.2.4.3.5 Draining the internal cooling water circuit of the SLS 200 CL16

1. Bleed cavity, item 1.2. Open the Legris connection item 2 for “IN”

cavity)3. Ausgesteckter Wasserschlauch item 3 in en-

ergy fluctuations.4. Connect the Legris connector of the double-

stroke pump (Part No. 31.1340) item 4 to the water connection at item 2 (water connec-tion for “IN” cavity).

5. Drain the water circuit with constant pressure several pump movements).

3.2.4.3.6 Draining the internal cooling water circuit of the FLS N

1. Insert a hose with an external diameter of 10 mm into the cooling unit's drain valve.2. Actuate the bleed valve on the cavity and drain the hoses and tank. 1 cm of water left in the tank is admissible.3. Loosen both hoses on the optical system's cooling unit and actuate the bleed valve on the cavity until all the water has drained from the hoses.4. Drain the deionising cartridge by loosening the supply hose above the pump. Re-fit the hose.

3.2.4.3.7 If the laser source is to be packed:

1. Pack the accessories separately, including the removed optics.2. Also pack deionised water which may be required for re-commissioning.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 03 04

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 03 10.indd

1 2

4 3

KavitätCavity


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651- 03 - 11

3.2.4.4 Special packing in the presence of high humidity

Pack the accessories and the whole unit to be airtight and add enough desiccants to cover the volume, especially in the proximity of the optical system.

3.2.4.5 Marking

Information on the optical system cover: Rod is covered. indicate locations where the desiccant was placed.

3.2.3.4 Maintenance when unit has been taken out of operation

Replace the desiccant annually or in accordance with the recommendations of the desiccant manufac-turer and check the packaging to make sure it is airtight.

3.2.4.7 Re-commissioning

Re-commissioning in accordance with chapter 3.1.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651- 03 - 12

3.3 Packaging, transportation

Describes to those persons authorised to carry out packaging and transportation how to package and transport safely. In this process the manufacturer differentiates between in-house and out-of-house transportation.


The laser sources must only be packed and transported by personnel who are sufficiently proficient in these activities and who have read and understood the instructions in this chapter.


NOTE

Major damage can be expected- if the non-packed or inadequately protected laser sources are moved with a crane- if they are transported in the rain or are stored for an extended period in a humid

environment- at freezing temperatures if not all the cooling water has been drained.

3.3.3 In-house transportation

A stipulation for the in-house transportation is that the equipment is taken out of operation in accordance with chapter 3.2.

The following means of transport are recommended:- roller-lift carrier- forklift truck- on rollers

WARNING

Risk of being trapped by the rolling laser sourceMove laser sources on rollers only on level surfaces.

If there is a separate optical system, it does not have to be disconnected from the cabinet if joint transport is possible. Should disconnection be necessary, the way of doing it is described in chapter 3.2.If transportation with a crane cannot be avoided, then it must be done in the manufacturer's original packaging.

3.3.4 Packaging, out-of-house transportation

3.3.4.1 Preceding activities

A stipulation for the out-of-house transportation is that the equipment is taken out of operation and dis-mantled in accordance with chapter 3.2.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651- 03 - 13

3.3.4.2 Packaging

Use the manufacturer's original packaging for packing.

A dampness protection, e.g. tarred paper, is to be applied.

Pack small parts in a (cardboard) box with cushioning and place it inside one of the crates.

Draw up a packing list.

3.3.4.3 Out-of-house transportation

Attach the following transport notices:

1. Fragile material2. Do not tilt3. Do not leave unprotected outdoors

The usual means of transport, tailored to the quality of the packaging, can be used for transportation.

3.4 Disposal

Describes to those persons authorised to carry out disposal how to do it in an appropriate and environ-ment-friendly way. In this process, the manufacturer differentiates between the disposal by the operator of operating equipment and service parts and the disposal of the laser source.


The laser source must only be disposed of by personnel who have been adequately trained for this activ-ity and have been instructed in the locally applicable official disposal regulations.


CAUTION

Danger for users and the environment!The regulations governing disposal issued by the legislator must be complied with in every country.

3.4.3 Disposal of operating equipment

CAUTION

Environmental damage!Special disposal is required: for batteriesAll other parts can be disposed of normally.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651- 03 - 14

3.4.3 Disposal of subassemblies

DANGER

Electric shock!Prior to disposal, the laser source is to be taken out of operation in accordance with chapter 3.2.

CAUTION

Danger for users and the environment!- Batteries have to be disposed of in a special way- Individual components contain PVC- Dispose of flashlamps as one unit if at all possible, no recycling of individual parts.

The laser source can be disposed of as electronic scrap. The materials mainly used are:

- steel, e.g. housings- aluminium, e.g. supports and components of the optical system- glass, e.g. mirrors and lenses; this is an inert material- cables made of copper and insulation- plastic components

3.4.5 Advice notes

The disposal of the laser source must be reported to the authorities if the laser source had been regis-tered with them.Notifying the manufacturer is desirable in order to make easier his duties of supporting his products.


A COMPANY OF THE



4 Setting up a processing installation

86 . 0651 - 04 - 01


This chapter describes how to set up a processing installation with a class 1 laser to the personnel au-thorised to do this work.

Table of contents

4.1 Specific safety measures 24.1.1 Emergency-off device 24.1.2 Laser warning lamp 24.1.3 Beam blocked illuminated display 24.1.4 Cutting with oxygen 34.1.5 Unattended operation 3

4.2 Setting up a fiber-optic beam guidance system 34.2.1 Laying the fiber-optic cables 34.2.2 Setting up the fiber-optic processing heads 3

4.3 Protection against vapours or other processing by-products 4

4.4 Protective housings, covers 44.4.1 Design of the protective housing 44.4.2 Viewing windows 4

4.5 Hazard signs and symbols 5

4.6 Supplement to the operating instructions 5

4.7 Safety acceptance of the processing facility 5


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 04 - 02

4.1 Specific safety measures

4.1.1 Emergency-off device

An emergency-off button to stop all dangerous situations must be located within the reach of the opera-tors. For this to work, the following may be necessary:

1. It may be necessary to connect another emergency-off button to the laser source.2. The laser source's emergency-off button is to be integrated into the processing installation's emer-

gency-off device.

The documents on this are in chapter 5.

4.1.2 Laser warning lamp

Every operating device and every laser outlet opening that can be moved 2 or more meters away from the existing warning lamps (operating panel and optical system) must be equipped with an additional emis-sion warning lamp. This must be clearly visible for all staff in the vicinity of the operating equipment or the laser outlet opening.

Additional warning lamps are needed in particular:

- when using fiber-optic cables for one or more processing heads,- when, in the case of direct beam guidance, the optical system or its warning lamp are not visible from

the processing point,- when installing the external operating panel into the installation's control system.

The emission warning lamps must be fitted in pairs (redundant).

If there are several laser outlet openings, the emission warning lamps must indicate clearly the outlet openings the laser light can come out of.

The documents on the connection are in chapter 5.

4.1.3 Beam blocked illuminated displayEvery laser processing installation must have the facility of blocking the beam, i.e. of locking the safety shutter in the closed position. In addition, the condition of the beam beam block must be indicated in a highly visible manner. The laser source meets these requirements. But it may be necessary to install an additional illuminated display to indicate beam blocking if the laser source's operating panel is not visible enough.

The documents on the connection are in chapter 5.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 04 - 03

NOTE

Oxygen promotes the occurrence of fires

1. Any fittings and the gas valve must not come into contact with oil or grease.2. Do not work alternately with oxygen and industrial compressed air since the latter is

rarely free or oil residues.3. Build a leakage monitor into the supply line, e.g. with automatic shut-off in the event

that pressure should drop.4. Monitor the extraction system for failure, as well as for fire or heat.5. Attach a sign notifying the operator staff of the oxygen hazard.6. No unattended operation.

4.1.4 Cutting with oxygen

4.1.5 Unattended operation

The following measures are recommended if the system is to be operated unattended:1. Watch out for leaks in the cooling water supply. Measure: close down the emergency-off circuit.2. Watch out for fire when cutting by burning and when welding highly reflective materials e.g. copper.

4.2 Setting up a fiber-optic beam guidance system

4.2.1 Laying the fiber-optic cables

WARNING ABOUT LASER RADIATION

Invisible laser radiation can leak if the fiber optic cable is damaged.

1. Lay the cable in such a way that it is well protected, e.g. inside metal profiles.2. Do not twist cables, avoid torsion.3. Do not go below the stipulated minimum bending radius.

CAUTION

Risk of tripping with badly laid cables.Lay cables away from walking and rest areas.

4.2.2 Setting up the fiber-optic processing heads

1. Fix them to the clamping surfaces provided.2. The processing heads must be adjustable in terms of focus. Resolution and reproducibility better

than / equal to 0.05 mm.3. The processing heads must be cooled through the holders in line with the average laser power.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 04 - 04

4.3 Protection against vapours or other processing by-products

DANGER

Hazardous vapours can be generated when the laser is processing certain materials.The operator must clarify the possible risks, including environmental protection, posed by the planned laser processing and to take the appropriate measures. These may include:1. Installation of a filtered extraction system.2. Warning and information sign.3. Regulation for maintaining and disposing of filters.4. Information and training of the staff concerned.

4.4 Protective housings, covers

If at all possible, the processing area must be completely covered by the manufacturer or user. If this is the case, then a class 1 laser is present that does not expose the user to any risk of laser radiation.

4.4.1 Design of the protective housing

The cover, even if made by the operator, must comply with the manufacturer's requirements. These are basically:

1. The processing area must be completely covered. The cover must be completely impermeable to laser light. It must not be possible for the laser light to destroy the cover; this can be achieved by using metal of sufficient thickness for example.2. All parts of the cover that can be removed for operation and maintenance must be secured with a

fail-safe safety switch. The safety switch should respond before the possibility of exposure to radiation occurs. The safety

switches must be connected to the safety circuit in accordance with chapter 5. The X50 “System” plug is provided for the cover of the processing area. A shutdown occurs here only

if the beam switch and the covers are open at the same time. This means that access to the work-piece is possible during breaks in processing without the laser having to be switched off.

Bridgeable safety interlocks (for service work only) must comply with the conditions of EN 60825.3. All parts of the cover that can be moved or removed for servicing and are not secured with a safety

switch must require the use of a tool to move or remove them.

4.4.2 Viewing windows

If a viewing window in the cover is requested, then a laser safety filter for 1064 nm must be installed. Protection stage I 1064 L6A in accordance with DIN 58215 is sufficient if the focusing lens is permanently fixed and is located at a minimum distance of 200 mm from the window (focal length of the lens less than or equal to 100 mm) or 300 mm (focal length 150 mm), or 500 mm (focal length 300 mm). Windows mea-suring 100 mm x 200 mm can be obtained from the manufacturer: Lasag part. No. 64.0089.It must be ensured that the accessible laser radiation (Nd:YAG and pilot laser) is below the limit values for class 1.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 04 - 05

4.5 Hazard signs and symbols

The appropriate warning signs must be displayed:

1. Sign for covers with bridgeable safety interlocks on the respective covers.2. Sign for covers without safety interlock on covers that are only removed for servicing work. The signs for covers must be clearly visible from the outside. a) Before moving or removing the part. b) In the vicinity of the opening created after moving or removing the part.3. The “Class 1 laser” sign can be attached.

In addition, other hazard signs or symbols may be required, e.g.:• Warning about chemical reactions of the processed material.• Regulation on the wearing of ear protectors during loud processing work if adequate sound-proof-

ing is not provided by the cover.• The wearing of welding safety goggles.

4.6 Supplement to the operating instructions

The Operating Instructions and the Service Manual must be written to include the processing facility or separate operating instructions need to be written.

4.7 Safety acceptance of the processing facility

Prior to release for operation, the entire installation must be checked by a suitably trained technician who is to ensure that all safety functions are in place and compliance with the applicable guidelines and stan-dards is given. The details in this chapter are probably not enough to meet this requirement. This chapter indicates in particular how the laser source is prepared in order to comply with laser standards.

If changes are made to the installation at a later date, continuing compliance with the applicable guide-lines and standards must be guaranteed.

In terms of laser safety this means in particular:

- laser classification- signs and labels- safety guidelines- Operating Instructions


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 01

5 System interfaces

The connection of the equipment to the mains power supply and to the cooling system, as well as the various ways of integrating them into the existing machine designs are the subject of this chapter.

The relevant diagrams can be found in chapter 9.

Table of contents

5.1 Overview and connection panel 25.1.1 KLS 246 and SLS 200 / SLS 200 CL connection panel 25.1.2 FLS 342N...1042N connection panel 35.1.3 Coding of plugs X50 to X54 45.1.4 Connector types used 5

5.2 SYSTEM X50 interface connector 65.2.1 Emergency-off concepts 75.2.2 Safety circuit, safe laser operation 85.2.3 External water valve, external cooling unit 85.2.4 Power supply to external operating terminals 9

5.3 User interface X54 OEM (optional) 95.3.1 Overview 95.3.2 Pin assignment 10

5.4 BNC output X60 11

5.5 X61 Terminal 115.5.1 Overview 115.5.2 Pin assignment 11

5.6 COM1/2/3/4 serial interfaces 125.6.1 Overview 125.6.2 Pin assignment 125.6.3 Configuration 135.6.4 Protocols 13


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 02

COM1 RS-232 interface electrically disconnected from the supply.

COM2 RS 232 interface electrically connected, usually occupied by a terminal.

COM3 / COM4 Other RS 232 interfaces as an option.

X50 SYSTEM Connections for emergency-off, safety switch, displays and power supplies to the hand-held terminal.Connections electrically connected to the power supply The laser does not work with-out the plug.

X51 USER1 Beam shutter SPS drive, gas valve, recipe selection, fiber-optic cable selection and pulse synchronisation. Electrically disconnected. Laser does not work with the plug pulled out.

X52 This plug can be allocated the following following (electrically disconnected from the power supply, but connected to USER1).USER2A SPS drive for parameter transmission (effective ones, recipes).USER3B SPS drive. Additions to USER1 (other recipes, fiber-optic cable status, laser-off, etc.).

X53 Plug for other USER options.

X54 OEM Connection of the external operating panel for an OEM option.

X59 Customer-specific pin configuration.

X61 Terminal Power supply for the hand-held terminal.

X75 LLEK1 Connection of the first fiber-optic connection for KOS or of the crackback.

X76 LLEK2 Connection of the second fiber-optic connection for KOS.

The description of the X75 and X76 plugs is given in chapter 13 of the service instructions.

5.1 Overview and connection panel

5.1.1 KLS 246 and SLS 200 / SLS 200 CL connection panel

The connection panel can be accessed after removing the cover.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 05 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 05 02.indd

COM 1COM 2COM 3 Option, X76 OptionCOM 4 Option, X75 Option

X61 Terminal

USER1X51

OptionX52X53X54X59

NetzMains

KühlwasserCooling water

SYSTEMX50


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 03

COM1 RS-232 interface electrically disconnected from the supply.

COM2 RS 232 interface, electrically connected. Usually occupied by a terminal. If a built-in terminal has been fitted internally, this interface is not present.

COM3 / COM4 Other RS 232 interfaces as an option. These interfaces are electrically connected to the power supply.

X50 SYSTEM Connections for emergency-off, safety switch, displays and power supplies to the hand-held terminal.Connections electrically connected to the power supply The laser does not work with-out the plug.

X51 USER1 Beam shutter SPS drive, gas valve, recipe selection, fiber-optic cable selection and pulse synchronisation. Electrically disconnected. Laser does not work with the plug pulled out.

X52 This plug can be allocated the following following (electrically disconnected from the power supply, but connected to USER1).USER2A SPS drive for parameter transmission (effective ones, recipes).USER3B SPS drive. Additions to USER1 (other recipes, fiber-optic cable status, laser-off, etc.).

X53 Plug for other USER options.

X54 OEM Connection of the external operating panel for an OEM option.

X59 Customer-specific pin configuration.

X60 BNC Analogue output for an electric image of the laser pulse.

X61 Terminal Power supply for the hand-held terminal.

X75 LLEK1 Connection of the first fiber-optic connection for KOS or of the crackback.

X76 LLEK2 Connection of the second fiber-optic connection for KOS.

The description of the X75 and X76 plugs is given in chapter 13 of the service instructions.

5.1.2 FLS 342N...1042N connection panel

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 05 02

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 05 03.indd

COM 1COM 2COM 3 OptionCOM 4 Option

X60X75, X76 OptionX61

X50X51OptionX52X53X54X59

NetzMains

KühlwasserCooling water


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 04

5.1.3 Coding of plugs X50 to X54

1 X50 SYSTEM

2 X51 USER1

3 X52 1. Plug for USER2 to 5

4 Reserve

5 X54 OEM

6 X59 Customer-specific specification

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 05 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 05 04.indd

ReserveX51

X50 X52

1 Pin 1 3

42

X54

X59

5

6


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 05

5.1.4 Connector types used

The following types of connectors are used (on the cable side) to connect to a laser power supply:

Connector Designation Type LASAG part No. Supplier part No.

COM1...4 9-pin, female D-Sub 63.2526 (female plug)

63.5055 (casing)

Farnell 150-812(Mc Murdo SDE9S)Farnell 463-012(MH-Connectors DTZK-9K)

X50X51X52

X54X59

SystemUSER1USER2USER4A/3BUSER5AUSER7AUSER8AOEMFast Shutter

Harting HAN E24+ 63.5154 (male plug)

63.5155 (casing)

Harting0933.024.2601 (pin insert)0930.024.0520 (casing)0930.000.9901(Coding bolts, x 2 required)

X53 USER6 Harting HAN DD108+ 63.5497 (pin insert)

63.5500 (crimp contact)63.5155 (casing)

Harting0916.108.3001 (pin insert)0915.000.6125(Crimp contact f. 0.75 mm2)0930.024.0520 (casing)0930.000.9901(Coding bolts, x 2 required)

X60 Laser pulse BNC 63.1760 Farnell 143-771(tyco 115-01-010)

X61 Terminal LUMBERGTYP SV70

63.5125 LUMBERG TYP SV70

X75, X76 LLEK1/2 D-Sub high density15 pin, male

63.5288 (connector)

63.5065 (casing)

Farnell 225-204(Mc Murdo HDE15PTDFarnell 463-012(MH-Connectors DTZK-9K

Gas valve M12x1 5 pin, male 63.5498 (coupling piece)

Farnell 348-0963(binder 79-3439-32-05)


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 06

5.2 SYSTEM X50 interface connector

Refer also to diagrams No. 13.0277-05-01/03 in chapter 9.

Pin assignment

PIN Signal Type Name Meaning1 ESTOPI I Emergency-off, internal2 ESTOPE I Emergency-off, external3 NC I Support point for ext. emergency-off switch4 ESTOP2E I ext. emergency-off circuit. Closing contact E5 ESTOP2C I ext. emergency-off circuit. Opener contact C6 ILWRE I Working room interlock Channel 2 (closing contact A)7 ILWREA O Working room interlock Channel 1 (opener contact A)8 LWARNL O Laser warning lamp Warning lamp redundant or fail-safe9 SHCL O Beam block lamp Lights up in "beam blocked" condition10 VENTILA I Solenoid valve Power supply for ext. water valve (max. 50V/6A DC)

11 GVALVO O Gas valve optical head max. 100 mA!12 +24V F7 O +24V DC on fuse F713 ESTOPEA O Emergency-off, external14 +24V F6 O +24V DC on fuse F6 (for emergency-off contacts)15 ESTOPEB I Emergency-off, external16 ESTOP2F O ext. emergency-off circuit. Closing contact F17 ESTOP2D O ext. emergency-off circuit. Opener contact D18 +24V F6 O +24V DC on fuse F6 (for IL contacts)19 ILWREB I Working room interlock Channel 1 (opener contact B)20 LONL O Laser on lamp Lights up when laser is running21 GND O Ground Return conductors for lamps22 VENTILB O Solenoid valve Switching output for ext. water valve23 GND O Ground24 +24V F7 O -24V DC on fuse F7

Indicator lamps: 28V/max. 1.2 W

Inductive loads (relays, contactors, solenoid valves) must be suppressed with suitable equipment (di-odes, RC modules, etc.).

It is recommended that screened cables that have the screen connected to the grounding points on both sides of the plugs are used for cabling.


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 07

5.2.1 Emergency-off concepts

5.2.1.1 Laser emergency-off also affects machinery

Working mode:

by pressing the laser's internal emergency-off button the emergency-off circuit is also opened through the free contact level(s) and the entire shut down as a result.

If this configuration is used, pressing only an emergency-off button has no effect on the laser. This configuration is only recommended if no other emergency-off buttons are required apart from the laser emergency-off button!

Other important points:

- If other emergency-off buttons are used in addition to the emergency-off buttons installed in the laser (e.g. in an operating terminal in the external panel), it is the responsibility of the machine builder to ensure that these switches switch off both the laser as well as the rest of the machine. It is vital that all emergency off buttons on one machine have the same function!

Refer to diagram No. 13.0277-17-01 in chapter 9.

5.2.1.1 Machine emergency-off also affects the laser

Working mode:

When pressed, the machine emergency-off button also switches the laser off. Any emergency-off button on the laser would not have any effect on the rest of the machine!

This switching mode can be chosen if there is no emergency-off button on the laser (e.g. “OEM” option with external operating panel).


- If this is the case, there must be no emergency-off button on the laser since it is vital that all emer-gency-off buttons on one machine have the same function!

Refer to drawing No.13.0277-17-02 in chapter 9.

5.2.1.3 Laser emergency-off and machine emergency-off

Working mode:

Both the machine emergency-off and the laser's installed emergency-off button switch off the entire system.


- If other emergency-off buttons are used in addition to the emergency-off buttons installed in the laser (e.g. in an operating terminal in the external panel), it is the responsibility of the machine builder to ensure that these switches switch off both the laser as well as the rest of the machine. It is vital that all emergency off buttons on one machine have the same function!

Refer to diagram No. 13.0277-17-03 in chapter 9.


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 08

5.2.2 Safety circuit, safe laser operation

Please read chapters 4 and 5 of the Integration Instructions on this point.

Refer also to diagrams No. 13.0277-05-01 to 03 in chapter 9.

5.2.2.1 Processing room safety circuit

For safe laser class 1 operation it is necessary to make off the processing room laser-tight and to secure the openings with category 3 or 4 safety switches.When operating class 4 lasers, the laser room must be secured in the same way.In this context, please comply with your national regulations on laser safety and staff protection.

5.2.2.2 Laser warning lamp

If the laser warning lamp on the optical system is not clearly visible for the operators, an additional, highly visible warning lamp must be installed in the vicinity of the operators.

It lights up when the system is used as a class 4 laser and flashes during servicing.The warning lamp must be fail-safe or redundant.

Specifications:Voltage: 28 V DCMax. current consumption: 50 mAColour: orange

5.2.2.3 Other signal lamps

In addition to the operating panel, the following lamps can also be connected if required:

Laser on lamp Lights up when the laser is switched on. Flashes when the laser is working outside the set tolerances. Colour: green

Laser off lamp Lights up when the laser is ready to be switched on. Flashes when the laser is not ready to be switched on. Colour: red

Beam block lamp Lights up when the beam block is active. Colour: white

Specifications:

Voltage: 28 V DCMax. current consumption: 50 mA

5.2.3 External water valve, external cooling unit

The contact which closes when the laser source's cooling is switched on is to be used as follows:

• The solenoid valve fitted to the laser power supply is opened by this contact when “Cooling On”.• If the external water cooling circuit is supplied from a heat pump, e.g. water-air cooler or chiller, then

this device has to be switched on automatically with the contact via a resonators.


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 09

NOTE

To prevent water damage!This connection must ensure that if there is a fault in the cooling system, such as a leak, the external cooling system is stopped.. It must be ensured that that the external cooling system is also ready to be switched on when the laser is ready to be switched on.

Remark: Linking any fault contact installed in the external cooler directly with the laser is not recom-mended. Reason 1: this removes from the user the facility of reacting quickly to this fault without stop-ping the laser. Reason 2: if only the laser is switched off, the temperature increases in any case until the laser cooling switches off with SP 39. But if this link is required nonetheless, then the following must be observed:

a) switch off the laser using the LOFF signal, pin 9 on the USER3B interface. If the USER3B option is not fitted, the signal can be sent via a free pin to USER1.

b) Set integrator parameter IP16, LOFF-CoolCoupl=1 so that the cooling system is switched off with the laser (with run-out time).

No bridges are necessary if the connection is made, diagram 13.0277-05-01 (chapter 9).

Diagram 13.0277-05-02 (chapter 9) shows the connection with an external power supply, 12 to 50 V, 6 A max.

Diagram 13.0277-05-03 (chapter 9) shows the connection with an internal power supply with 24V, 50 mA max.

5.2.4 Power supply to external operating terminals

Normally, external operating terminals are powered from the laser power supply via the X61 connector. But an external power supply can also be used. If this is the case, then it must be ensured that the COM2 interface to which the terminal concerned is connected is electrically connected to the laser supply.

5.3 User interface X54 OEM (optional)

5.3.1 Overview

In cases where the laser operating elements are to be integrated into a machine operating system, an external laser operating panel with a 5 m cable is available which can be installed in a front aperture (refer to drawing 45.3778 in chapter 9). The operating panel on the laser is not required as a result.

DANGER

Install an emergency-off button Since there is no emergency-off button on the laser if this option is chosen, it is vital that an emergency-off button is provided on the machine side. When this button is pressed, it must switch off both the machine and the laser! Refer to chapter 5.2.1 of these instructions.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 10

The OEM interface, connector X54, is available for connecting the external operating panel. The connec-tion is made with a 24-pin industrial plug (HARTING, Amphenol i.a.). Socket on equipment side, pins on cable side.

The connections are made electrically with the control connection and the 24V power supply.

Legend in the following pin assignment tables: I = laser power supply input O = laser power supply output

5.3.2 Pin assignment

Diagrams 32.1892-01-01 & 13.0277-04-01/chapter 9 show the connection of the external operating panel.

PIN Signal Type Name Meaning1 +24V F6 O 24V power supply, fuse F62 IL I Channel 1 interlock3 IL I Channel 1 interlock4 LOFFS I Laser Off button Channel 25 ILKEY I Interlock key switch Channel 26 - - Emergency-off relay Switch on circuit of emergency-off relay7 LSBYL O Laser standby lamp8 LWARNL O Laser warning lamp Warning lamp redundant or fail-safe9 NC10 NC11 NC12 NC13 GND O Ground14 IL O Channel 1 interlock15 IL I Channel 1 interlock16 LCKEY I Laser class key switch Channel 217 Emergency-off relay Switch on circuit of emergency-off relay18 LONS I Laser On button Channel 219 LONL O Laser on lamp20 SHCL O Beam block lamp Lights up to show the status of the beam block21 NC22 NC23 NC24 NC


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 11

5.4 BNC output X60

At the BNC output, an electrical image of the laser pulse can be obtained, e.g. with an oscilloscope. The level is based on the one hand on the characteristics of the optical system used and, on the other, on the setting of the integrator parameter No. 31 “Ampl1” (0,1,2, corresponding to low, medium, large).The integrator parameter No. 31 can be set only to the point that the signal at the BNC output is not more than 9 V anywhere, since the energy measurement might provide incorrect values otherwise!An optimum signal with as little interference as possible is the result of using a differential sensor since ground loops between the ground and the the laser control system's analogue ground are avoided in this way.The output should be loaded with not less than 10 kOhm.

5.5 X61 Terminal

5.5.1 Overview

Connector X61 (terminal) is available to provide power to the hand-held terminal or to an external built-in terminal.Any emergency-off buttons present on the terminals are also connected through this plug.

Legend in the following pin assignment tables: I = laser power supply input O = laser power supply output P = terminal power supply


Diagram 32.1887-02-01 in chapter 15 shows the connection of a hand-held terminal.

Type (cable): Lumberg SV70 (7-pin, male)

PIN Signal Type Name Meaning1 PWR 24V P 24V power supply2 NC reserved for emergency-off channel 1 (NotStop0)3 NC reserved for emergency-off channel 2 (NotStop3)4 PWR 0V P 0V power supply5 NC reserved for emergency-off channel 1 (NotStop1)6 NC reserved for emergency-off channel 2 (NotStop2)7


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 12

5.6 COM1/2/3/4 serial interfaces

The laser is operated and remotely controlled via the serial interfaces. Extensive access facilities to the internal system variables (for diagnostic purposes) are also possible.They are primarily suitable for connecting LASAG operating terminals and for the remote diagnosis via modems.

5.6.1 Overview

Both operating devices and the higher-order control or monitoring systems can be connected using the RS-232 interfaces.

2 interfaces (COM1 and COM2) are available as standard, with COM2 normally occupied by an operating device.

COM1 is electrically disconnected from the laser power supply, whereas COM2 is connected to it.

Two more interfaces, COM3 and COM4, are available as an option. They are also electrically connected with the laser power supply.

Basically, all interfaces have the same functions.

Connection is made by a 9-pin D-sub connector. Pins on equipment (device) side, sockets on cable side. A metal plug housing is recommended in order to provide optimum screening. The cable length for 9600 Bd is 15 m max. and this should not be exceeded in industrial conditions, even if transmission rates are low. The use of a RS-232/RS-485 converter (or similar product) is recommended for greater distances.


PIN Signal Type Name Meaning1 Not connected2 RxD I Reception data3 TxD O Transmission data4 DTR * O Data Terminal Ready5 GND Ground6 Not connected7 RTS * O Request to send8 CTS * I Clear to send9 Not connected

* Signals not used

Legend: I = Input O = Output

A NULL modem cable (RxD / TxD crossed) is required for connection to a PC.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE



5 System interfaces

86 . 0651 - 05 - 13

5.6.3 Configuration

The baud rate can be set between 600 and 9600 Baud for each of the max. 4 serial interfaces using the integrator parameter COM1Baud (IP No. 2) to COM4Baud (IP No. 4, 6, 8). The other parameters cannot be changed: 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, handshake via ON/XOFF.From SW-V80 and higher, the baud rate can be set to 19’200 Bd, and parity to none (no), odd or even.

5.6.4 Protocols

The serial interface protocols are described on the CD, part No. 32.9510.


A COMPANY OF THE



6 X51 and X52 USER interfaces

86 . 0651 - 06 - 01


The laser can be remote-controlled via the USER interfaces using standard 24V interfaces. For this rea-son they are ideal for being driven by SPS control systems.

The relevant diagrams can be found in chapter 9.

Table of contents

6.1 Available interfaces 2

6.2 USER1 Interface (standard) 46.2.1 Overview 46.2.2 Inputs 46.2.3 Outputs 76.2.4 Power supplies 86.2.5 Sequences 8

6.3 USER2A Interface (optional) 126.3.1 Pin assignment 136.3.2 Data transmission 136.3.3 Procedure 19

6.4 USER3B Interface (optional) 216.4.1. Inputs 216.4.2 Outputs 216.4.3 Power supplies 21

6.5 USER4A/5A Interfaces (options) 226.5.1 Operation 226.5.2 Integration 23

6.6 USER 6, Multiple processing stations (optional) 266.6.1 Brief description and safety 266.6.2 X53 USER6 Signal Description 296.6.3 Requirements of processing stations (WS) and Workstation Manager (WSM) 306.6.4 Creation of the interlock circuits and the other functions of the SYSTEM group 316.6.5 USER and COM interfaces 326.6.6 WSM: The Active Processing Station 326.6.7 Operating principle of the interlock circuits of multiple processing stations 34

6.7 USER7A, USER8A, USER9A, Fast Shutter (optional) 376.7.1 Signals 376.7.2 Sequences 39

6.8 WIMP Controller (optional) 42

6.9 Synchronising the laser pulses of several lasers 426.9.1 General 426.9.2 Types of synchronisation 436.9.3 Cabling 436.9.4 Principle of Synchronisation 436.9.5 Other comments on the combined operation of several lasers 44


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 02

6.1 Available interfaces

The USER1 interface on connector X51 is fitted as standard to every laser. The USER2A, USER3B/C, USER4A, USER5A and USER6 functions are available on the connectors X52 and / or X53 as an option.

X52: because of the limited number of interface connectors it is possible to combine signal groups. One signal group A and one signal group B can be combined with each other, e.g. USER2A and USER3B, for each free interface connector. But they can only be used individually (e.g. only USER3B). The “All” signal group is present on all interface connectors.

X53: The X53 interface connector has space for all options. Pin assignment in accordance with the diagram in chapter 9.

X51 OK OK OK

X52 OK OK Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

X53 OK Optional OK Optional Optional OK Optional Optional

Pin No. All USER1 USER2A USER3B USER3C USER4A USER5A USER6 USER7A USER9A

X51 / X52 1) 2) 2)

1 RC SS LONSEXT0 NC WSHIL0

13 RF ST LONSEXT1 NC WSHIL1

2 LP0 D0 LONSEXT2 NC WSHIL2

14 LP1 D1 LONSEXT3 NC WSHIL3

3 SOC D2 ESTOP2E ESTOP2E WSHIL4

15 PB D3 ESTOP2F ESTOP2F WSHIL5

4 PR D4 WSHIL6 SOCF FSCC

16 GVALV D5 WSSIL0 SOF FSNO

5 LL0 D6 WSSIL1 SOT

17 LL1 D7 WSSIL2 WPT

6 RCA LSTAT1 WSSIL3 ERR ERR

WSSIL4

18 SO LP2 LP2 WSSIL5

7 OK LP3 LP3 WSSIL6

19 FINP1 LL2 LL2 FISCC1

8 HL res LL3 FISCC2

20 TP res FISCC3

9 FP LOFF LOFF FISCC4

21 WP LSTAT0 LSTATO FISCC5

FISCC6

10 res FISO1

22 res FISO2

11 GND-ext FISO3

23 24V-ext FISO4

12 GND FISO5

24 24V FISO6

Remarks:

The signal group USER3B is available from NLS-SW-Version 34 (22h) and higher.The signal group USER2A is available from NLS-SW-Version 48 (30h) and higher and requires a 2-board NLS.Signal groups USER4A and USER5A will be available as retrofits from June 1999 onwards.The power supply pins of the optional connectors are connected with those of the USER1 interface.Connector description and coding in chapter 6.3.

1) Can be combined with USER4A (then becomes USER8A)2) Can be combined with USER4A and USER5A


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 03

Specification of the input circuits:

- opto-decoupled, electrically disconnected from the laser power supply- all interface signals with common GND and +24V- input current at 24V: 8mA- min. input voltage for “High” condition: 16V- max. input voltage for “Low” condition: 8V- max. input voltage: +30V- pole reversal protection to -30V

Specification of the output circuits:

- opto-decoupled, electrically disconnected from the laser power supply- max. output voltage: 50mA per output- short-circuit-proof for 1 minute maximum

Specification of the interface power supply (+24V - ext / GND - ext):

Pin Signal Type Meaning

11 GND-ext I GND of interface power supply

23 +24V-Ext I +24V of interface power supplyA +24V supply must be provided in order to operate the input and output circuits electrically disconnected from the internal power supply.

12 GND O GND of internal device power supply

24 +24V O +24V of device internal power supply. Can be used for interface power supply if electrical disconnection is not wanted. A maximum of 2A is available for all external connections

Specification of the interface power supply:

- +24V +/-10%- at least 30 mA, plus input and output currents- Interface functions only when voltage is applied (externally or internally)

If inductive loads (relays, contactors, solenoid valves), they must be suppressed with suitable equipment (diodes, RC modules, etc.).It is recommended that screened cables that have the screen connected to the grounding points on both sides of the plugs are used for cabling.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 03.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 03.indd


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 04

6.2 USER1 Interface (standard)

6.2.1 Overview

To drive the laser by remote control, or by a higher-order control system, a USER1 24V interface (connec-tor X51), suited to the SPS, is available in addition to the serial interfaces

The connection is made with a 24-pin industrial plug (HARTING, Amphenol i.a.). Socket on equipment side, pins on cable side.

A screened cable is to be used for the connection to a higher-order control system and its screen earthed on both sides (X51: connector's grounding terminal).

The tables below give the assignment and signal explanation of this connector

Legend: I = laser power supply input O = laser power supply output

6.2.2 Inputs

RC is always dealt with independent of the condition of the RCA output.

Pin Signal Type Name Meaning

1 RC I remote control Action group A and, depending on LP0/1, action group D are requested with this signal.Acknowledge with RCA if all action groups are avail-able.

The other inputs are only dealt with if RCA=1. If RCA=0 these signals are considered as inactive (=0).


2 LP0 I laser parameter setselection 0

One of the recipe parameter sets 1 .. 3 (binary coding) is copied to the working set with the signals LP0 and LP1.If both signals are at 0, the action group D is released or not requested.To prevent unwanted recipes from being selected, care must be taken to ensure that no transient values are produced by “overlapping”.Confirmation with OK (0: as long as process not suc-cessful; 1: if process successful)

3 SOC I shutter open command Command to open (SOC=1) or close (SOC=0) the shut-terAcknowledgement by SOIntegrator parameters No. 19 “ShImmSync” and No. 18 “GasShCoupl” determine whether the shutter opens immediately/synchronised and with/without gasThe shutter is also closed by removing RC


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 05


4 PR I parameter ramping If this signal is +24V, then ramping up takes place, if it is 0 V, then ramping down takes place. The integrator parameter IP62 (RampConfig, SW-V80 and higher) de-fines whether the pulse duration, or amplitude ramp-ing, is triggered, and what number of ramping pulses are used for ramping up or down.Continuous pulse ramping: during ramping up, a continuous transition occurs from “normal” ramping to the ramping pulse width during the number of ramping pulses.During ramping down, there is a return from the ramp-ing pulse width to the “normal” pulse width.Amplitude ramping (SW-V80 and higher, only for RTPS power supply): during ramping up, a continu-ous transition from the “normal” to the ramping power takes place during the number of ramping pulses.During ramping down, there is a return from ramping power width to “normal” power.

5 LL0 I fiber-optic 0 The signals LL0 and LL1 select one of the fiber-optic configurations 0 .. 3. Acknowledgement via FINP1

8 HL I HALT 1: pulse triggering is blocked immediately, a current pulse is aborted.0: pulse triggering is released in a synchronised man-ner. Works with open and closed shutter. A current pulse burst is stopped, but not abortedThis process is very sensitive to interference because of its speed. Connect the input to GNDext (terminal 11) on con-nector X51 when not in use!

13 RF I remote frequency The laser is switched to external frequency with this signal. Pulse input TP

14 LP1 I laser parameter setselection 1

Refer to LP0 (X51-2)

15 PB I pulse burst A positive slope at this pin triggers a complete pulse burst (open shutter, release number of pulses, close shutter).Acknowledge with SO signal. By removing RC a pulse burst is aborted.The following can also be defined in addition by the integrator parameter IP61 (PBConfig, from SW-V80 on-wards):- single pulse, or number of pulses in accordance

with laser parameter Nburst- with or without gas lead-in and run-out


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 06


16 GVALV I gas valve Open/close gas valve in the optical headWith IP18=1 (GasShCoupl) the “On” command of the two signals SOC and GVALV prevails.Not supported by SW-V80Please use gas coupling (see IP18 or IP62)

17 LL1 I fiber-optic 1 Refer to LL0 (X51-5)

20 TP I trigger pulse Is used to power and internal clock (effective if RF=1).If the external frequency is too high, then 1 of 2 pulses is faded out first, if the frequency is even higher, then 2 of 3, then 3 of 4 and so on.With a corresponding link in “OKmode” (integrator pa-rameter No. 17) Ok goes to 0 in this case.This process is very sensitive to bouncing processes and interference because of its speed. Absolute care must be taken to ensure that a bounce-free signal (no contacts with relay!) is used to control the process.Connect the input to GNDext (terminal 11) on con-nector X51 when not in use!

Specification of the input circuits:

- opto-decoupled, electrically disconnected- Input current at +24V: 8mA- Switching threshold Low-High for Uin >= 16V- Switching threshold High-Low for Uin >= 8V- max. input voltage: +30V- Pole reversal protection to -30V


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 07

6.2.3 Outputs

The outputs are dealt with independent of the condition of the RC and RCA signals.


6 RCA O remote control accepted

Indicates that this interface has all requested action groups at its disposalIs a prerequisite for dealing with all the inputs, apart from RC

7 OK O laser OK Indicates the OK condition of the laser. Depends on the configuration of the integrator parameter “OKmode”1= everything OK0= one of the linked conditions in the “OKmode” is not OK or data transmission via USER2 interface was not successful (refer to chapter 6.3)

9 FP O firing pulse For SIM/ALT = SIM:Indicates a positive flank at the beginning of the delay time of every laser pulse. Pulse shape symmetrical (for RF = int).For SIM/ALT = ALT:Indicates a positive flank at the beginning of the delay time of every second laser pulse. Pulse shape sym-metrical (for RF = int).For RF = ext:Pulse width = Text - Tmaxext (but always bigger than 10 us)

18 SO O shutter is open Is 1 when the beam shutter is open.Is 0 when the beam shutter is moving or is closed

19 FINP1 O fiber 1 in position Indicates that the deflection mirrors for all fiber-optic cables are in the desired positionIf this signal is 0, then the mirrors are still in motion

21 WP O working pulse A pulse is generated here for every laser pulse that is given off when the shutter is open. The pulse length is defined by the integrator parameter No. 15 “WP-Length”. If the WP pulse is longer than the period dura-tion of the laser frequency, constant +24V appear.

Specification of the output circuits:

- opto-decoupled, electrically disconnected- max. output voltage: 50mA- short-circuit-proof 1 min.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 08

6.2.4 Power supplies

Pin Signal Type Meaning

11 GND-ext I GND of interface power supply

23 +24V-Ext I +24V of interface power supplyA +24V supply must be provided in order to operate the input and output circuits electrically disconnected from the internal power supply.

12 GND O GND of internal device power supply

24 +24V O +24V of device internal power supply. Can be used for interface power supply if electrical disconnection is not wanted. A maximum of 2A is available for all external connections

Specification of the interface power supply:- +24V +/-10%- at least 30 mA, plus input and output currents- Interface functions only when supply voltage is applied (externally or internally)

For the pin assignment, please refer also to diagrams 13.0277-06-01/02 in chapter 9.

6.2.5 Sequences

Before the USER1 interface reacts to any signal, the required action groups have to be requested with the RC signal. The action groups that are necessary (A, D) is identified by the laser control unit on the basis of the other interface signals.

To confirm that all the necessary action groups are available, the RCA signal goes from 0 to 1. This means that the USER1 interface has control of the laser.

If one of the required action groups is occupied by another interface (e.g. a COM interface), the RCA signal remains at 0.

If a recipe set is to be copied to the working set with the signals LP0/1, the OK signal goes to 0 for at least 50 ms and remains 0 until the copying has been completed successfully (prerequisite: bit 5 of integrator parameters No.17 “OKMode” is set to 1).

In addition, the OK signal can indicate whether the capacitor voltage has also been set to the new value.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 09

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 02

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 09.indd

Delay: >100us

SIM/ALT = sim, RF = 0

SIM/ALT = alt, RF = 0

LaserpulsLaser pulses

FP


FP

ext. Frequenz teilw. zu hochexternal frequency in part too highSIM/ALT = sim, RF = 1


FP

Periodendauer der max. zulässigen FrequenzPeriod duration of the permissible frequency

SIM/ALT = sim, RF = 1

TP

schraffierte TP-Pulse werden ausgeblendet , da sie zu früh kommenhatched pulses are in part faded out, because they arrive too soon

FP

LaserpulsLaser pulse

TP

Periodendauer der max. zulässigen FrequenzPeriod duration of the permissible frequency


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 10

Shutter öffnen / shutter open command

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 10.indd

Bearb. PulsProcess. pulses

Shutter

SO

SOC (synchronised)

geschlossenclosed

geschlossenclosed

Shutter


Bearb. PulsProcess. pulses

FP

SO


SOC (immediate)

FP

offenopen

offenopen


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 11

Fiber-optic configuration LL0 ... LL3 and FNP1

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet fürDatei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 14

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 11.indd

RC anlegenSet RC = 1

RCA einlesenRead RCA

LL0...LL3 einstellenChange LL0...LL3

FINP1 einlesenRead FINP1

tfly = LLOS: < 100 mstfly = LLEK: < 400 ms

Akt

ions

grup

pe a

nfor

dern

R

eque

st A

ctio

n G

roup

FIN

P1

noch

igno

riere

n Ig

nore

FIN

P1

Akt

ions

grup

pe e

rhal

ten

Act

ion

grou

p re

ceiv

ed10

ms

war

ten

nach

RC

A =

1

Wai

t 10

ms

afte

r R

CA

= 1

Spi

egel

um

stel

len

Cha

nge

mirr

ors

Akt

ions

grup

pe a

bgeb

en

Free

act

ion

grou

pA

ktio

nsgr

uppe

abg

egeb

en

Act

ion

grou

p is

free

FIN

P1

igno

riere

n Ig

nore

FIN

P1

War

ten

bis

FIN

P =

1W

ait u

ntil

FIN

P1

= 1

War

ten

bis

FIN

P =

1W

ait u

ntil

FIN

P1

= 1

Arb

eite

n m

it ne

uer

Spo

egel

eins

tellu

ngW

orki

ng w

ith n

ew m

irror

con

figur

atio

n

10 m

s w

arte

n na

ch S

pieg

elum

stel

lung

Wai

t 10

m s

aft

er m

irror

cha

nge

Arb

eite

nW

orki

ng

< 10 ms tfly < 10 ms tfly

Warten bis RCA = 1Waiting for RCA = 1


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 12

Pulse Burst

6.3 USER2A Interface (optional)

This interface can be used for the parameter transmission from an SPS control system to the laser. It works the standard 24 V inputs and outputs. 10 outputs and 1 input are required on the SPS control sys-tem. Care must be taken to ensure that the output signals are bounce-free (e.g. transistor outputs).

A screened cable is to be used for the connection to a higher-order control system and its screen earthed on both sides (X52: connector's grounding terminal).

Instead of an SPS control system it is also possible to use a PC with a digital I/O card for 24 V signals (open-collector-high-side-driver) (e.g. program from the company ADDI-DATA in D-77833 Ottersweier, http://www.addi-data.com).

USER2A interface, along with USER1 interface, occupies the internal communication channel No. 7.

The functionality of USER2A is only unidirectional, i.e. no values can be output (exception: LSTAT1 sig-nal).

The USER2A interface requires a 2-board NLS.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 04

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 11.indd

Shutter geschlossenclosed

Bearb.pulsProcess. pulses

SO

HL

RCA

PB (N=4)

RC


FP

offenopen


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 13


Depending on the type of laser, the connector for the USER2A interface is located a the X52 or X53 posi-tions. The pin assignment can be seen from the overview at the beginning of this chapter and from the diagram No. 13.0277-07-01 in chapter 9.

6.3.2 Data transmission

One of the following protocols can be used to program data through the USER2A interface.

The format to be used is defined in integrator parameter No. 12 “USER2_FormatA”.

Every 8-bit data byte consists of 2 decimal numbers in BCD code (4 bits each). The “ones” occupy the data lines D0 ... D3 and the “tens” the lines D4 .. D7.

The data bytes are applied to the data signals D0 ... D7 one after the other and promoted into the laser control system by a brief activation of the SS (S-strobe) and ST (T-strobe) control signals.

The signals LSTAT1 (USER2-I/F) and OK (USER1-I/F) indicate the success/failure of the data transmis-sion (refer to the chapter entitled “Parameter commands”).

If device addressing is used, then several lasers with USER2 interfaces can be operated through the same SPS outputs using the one SPS.

6.3.2.1 ST Protocol

Attention: Not all laser parameters can be used with this protocol!

The S data word determines the parameter to be transmitted as well as the position of the decimal point for the parameter value.

The T data words determines the value of the parameter to be transmitted (along with the position of the decimal point from the S data word). Only 2 significant digits can can transmitted for the parameter with this protocol.

The minimum times given above are also valid for the T-strobe signals and they must not be undershot. But they can be longer by any amount.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 05

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 12.indd

T-Dataword

min. 1ms

T-Strobe

S-Strobe

S-Dataword

min. 1ms

min. 6ms

next S-Strobe min.50ms


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 14

Parameter Transmission Effect

S data word T data wordBlock command(from SW-V80)

98 ZZ ZZ = 0: block endZZ = 1: Block beginningWith these commands, several laser param-eters can be transmitted to the laser one af-ter the other, whereby the limit value check only takes place after the block end. As a result, any problems linked with the new parameters that run into an existing WPS, and that could lead to limit value violations when they interact with the existing WPS, are avoided.

Request / relinquish action groups

97 ZZ ZZ = 00 : relinquish all action groups 04 : change only effective parameter set 16 : change only recipe parameter set 20 : change effective parameter set and recipe setsother values not possible

Set preselection 96 ZZ ZZ = 00 : setpoint value of the effective set 01..15 : setpoint values of recipe sets 1..15 21..35 : minimum values of recipe sets 1..15 41..55 : maximum values of recipe sets 1..15Setting after mains on: 00

Frequency 01 ZZ Z.Z Hz02 ZZ ZZ.0 Hz03 ZZ ZZ0.0 Hz04 ZZ ZZ00.0 Hz (max. 5000.0 Hz)

Pulse width 10 ZZ 0.ZZ ms11 ZZ Z.Z0 ms12 ZZ ZZ.0 ms13 ZZ ZZ0.0 ms (max. 200ms)


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 15


S data word T data wordVoltage 20 ZZ ZZ V

21 ZZ 1ZZ V22 ZZ 2ZZ V23 ZZ 3ZZ V24 ZZ 4ZZ V25 ZZ 5ZZ V26 ZZ 6ZZ V27 ZZ 7ZZ V28 ZZ 8ZZ V29 ZZ 9ZZ V

Energy setpoint value 30 ZZ 0.ZZ J31 ZZ Z.Z0 J32 ZZ ZZ.0 J33 ZZ ZZ0.0 J

NRamp 42 ZZ ZZ Imp.43 ZZ ZZ0 Imp.

NBurst 52 ZZ ZZ Imp.53 ZZ ZZ0 Imp.

Delay 60 ZZ 0.ZZ ms61 ZZ Z.Z0 ms62 ZZ ZZ.0 ms63 ZZ ZZZ.0 ms (max. 200ms)

TGas 72 ZZ ZZ ms73 ZZ ZZ0 ms74 ZZ ZZ00 ms

Beam-Expander Pos. 82 ZZ ZZ (0..99%)Energy Control 90 0Z Z = 0 : switched off

Z = 1 : switched onEnergy Control Mode 91 0Z Z = 0 : blocked

Z = 1 : releasedSIM / ALT (setpoints) 92 0Z Z = 0 : auto

Z = 1 : simZ = 2 : alt

SAMode 93 0Z Z = 0 : blockedZ = 1 : released

Device address 99 ZZ ZZ = Address


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 16

6.3.2.2 TSS Protocol

The T data word determines the parameter to be transmitted.

The S1 and S2 data words together determine the value of the parameter to be transmitted. The first of the 4 BCD digits indicates the position of the decimal point. A maximum of 3 significant digits can be transmitted.

The minimum times given above are also valid for the S-strobe signals and they must not be undershot. But they can be longer by any amount.


Tdata word

S1data word

S2data word

Block command(from SW-V80)

98 00 XX XX = 0: block endXX = 1: Block beginningWith these commands, several laser pa-rameters can be transmitted to the laser one after the other, whereby the limit value check only takes place after the block end. As a result, any problems linked with the new parameters that run into an exist-ing WPS, and that could lead to limit value violations when they interact with the ex-isting WPS, are avoided.

Action group request / relinquish

97 00 ZZ ZZ = 00 : relinquish all action groups 04 : change only effective parameter set 16 : change only recipe parameter set 20 : change effective parameter set and recipe setsother values not possible

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 06

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 15.indd

S1-Dataword S2-Dataword

min. 1ms

S-Strobe

T-Strobe

T-Dataword

min. 1ms

min. 6ms

next T-Strobe min.50ms


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 17


Tdata word

S1data word

S2data word

Set preselection 96 00 ZZ ZZ = 00 : setpoint value of the effective set 01..15 : setpoint, min. and max. values of recipe sets 1..15Setting after mains on: 00

Frequency setpoint value 00 1Z2Z

XXXX

ZX.X HzZXX.0 Hz

Pulse width setpoint value

01 0Z1Z2Z

XXXXXX

Z.XX msZX.X msZXX.0 ms (max. 200ms)

Voltage setpoint value 02 2Z XX ZXX VEnergy setpoint value 03 0Z

1Z2Z

XXXXXX

Z.XX JZX.X JZXX.0 J

NRamp setpoint value 04 2Z XX ZXX Imp.NBurst setpoint value 05 2Z XX ZXX Imp.Delay setpoint value 06 0Z

1Z2Z

XXXXXX

Z.XX msZX.X msZXX.0 ms

TGas setpoint value 07 2Z XX ZXX msBeamExpander Pos.

08 20 XX XX (0..99%)

Gas run-outsetpoint value*

09 2Z XX ZXXms

Power setpoint value* 10 2Z3Z4Z

XX ZXX Watt (max. 999W)ZXX0 Watt (max. 9990W)ZXX00 Watt (max. 65500W)

NRampOff setpoint value*

11 2Z XX ZXX pulse

AScale setpoint value* 12 2Z XX ZXX (0..200%)Frequencyminimum value

20 1Z2Z

XXXX

ZX.X HzZXX.0 Hz

Pulse widthminimum value

21 0Z1Z2Z

XXXXXX


Voltageminimum value

22 2Z XX ZXX V

Energy minimum value 23 0Z1Z2Z

XXXXXX

Z.XX JZX.X JZXX.0 J

NRamp minimum value 24 2Z XX ZXX Imp.NBurst minimum value 25 2Z XX ZXX Imp.

* available from SW-V80 onwards


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 18


Tdata word

S1data word

S2data word

Delay minimum value 26 0Z1Z2Z

XXXXXX


TGas minimum value 27 2Z XX ZXX msBeam expanderpos. min. value

28 20 XX XX (0..99%)

Gas run-outminimum value*

29 2Z XX ZXXms

Power minimum value* 30 2Z3Z4Z


NRampOff minimum value*

31 2Z XX ZXX pulse

AScale maximum value*

32 2Z XX ZXX (0..200%)

Frequencymaximum value

40 1Z2Z

XXXX

ZX.X HzZXX.0 Hz

Pulse widthmaximum value

41 0Z1Z2Z

XXXXXX


Voltagemaximum value

42 2Z XX ZXX V

Energymaximum value

43 0Z1Z2Z

XXXXXX

Z.XX JZX.X JZXX.0 J

NRampmaximum value

44 2Z XX ZXX Imp.

NBurst maximum value 45 2Z XX ZXX Imp.Delay maximum value 46 0Z

1Z2Z

XXXXXX


TGas minimum value 47 2Z XX ZXX msBeam exp. pos. max. value

48 20 XX XX (0..99%)

Gas run-out maximum value*

49 2Z XX ZXXms

Power maximum value*

50 2Z3Z4Z


NRampOff maximum value*

51 2Z XX ZXX pulse

Minimum and maximum values are only possible for the recipe sets (1..15).



A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 19


Tdata word

S1data word

S2data word

AScale maximum value* 52 2Z XX ZXX (0..200%)Energy Control (setpoint values)

90 00 0X X = 0 : switched offX = 1 : switched on

Energy Control Mode 91 00 0X X = 0 : blockedX = 1 : released

SIM / ALT (setpoints) 92 00 0X X = 0 : autoX = 1 : simX = 2 : alt

SAMode 93 00 0X X = 0 : blockedX = 1 : released

Device address 99 00 XX XX = address

Minimum and maximum values are only possible for the recipe sets (1..15).


6.3.3 Procedure

With addressing enabled (integrator parameter 13 “Dev_Address” is set to a value between 0 and 8) the laser control system must be the first to be addressed before it accepts any laser parameters.This means that the laser control system “listens” to commands from the USER2 interface until an “alien” address is transmitted. The laser control system then “listens” to the commands matching the new address.After any addressing the required action group (can be more than one) must also be requested.Now comes set preselection to determine where the following laser parameters are to be stored. After mains on, the working parameter set is the default set. This means that the working (effective) parameter set is chosen without set preselection.

6.3.3.1 Addressing

With integrator parameter No. 13 “Dev_Address” the device address is set on the USER2 bus (settings 0 .. 8) and the addressing is set to inactive (setting 9, works setting).This means that several laser devices can be operated on a USER2 interface bus (attention: every device needs its own SPS input for the LSTAT1 signal).With the addressing set to on, the user has to send the S99 or T99 command with a device address before any parameter commands. This means that the laser control device can begin to “listen” to the USER2 commands, whose own address corresponds to the transmitted address. All other devices do not “listen” to the commands, but wait until their own address appears on the USER2 interface.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 20

The “listening” device reacts until an address deviatin“g from its own address is transmitted.This addressing works only on USER2 interface and has no influence on the serial COM interfaces or the USER1 and USER3 interfaces.With “Dev_Address” = 9, the addressing is switched off and the laser control system reacts to every com-mand at the USER2 interface.

6.3.3.2 Set preselection

The user defines with this command the parameter set all the following commands are to apply to. This set preselection is valid until

- a new set is preselected or - the mains voltage is switched off

After “mains on” set 0 (= effective set) is automatically preselected.If invalid parameters are transmitted with this command, the OK signal goes to 0 for 50 ms (+/- 5 ms) and then goes back to 1.

6.3.3.3 Parameter commands

Before the actual parameters can be written, the corresponding action groups must be requested.If one or more action groups are requested with the command S97 TZZ, or T97 S00 SZZ, the laser control device repeatedly attempts to completely occupy these action groups (similar to RC). In this process the LSTAT1 signal goes to 0 until

- either all requested action groups are available or - a further such command is successful (e.g. only request one action group or relinquish action groups).

As long as all the action groups requested are not available, no commands (except for action group com-mands) are accepted.

If invalid action groups are requested with this command, LSTAT1 also goes to 0 until

- a valid command is present or- the mains voltage is switched off.

When all requested action groups have been issued, LSTAT1 goes to 1.The parameters can then be written.Every parameter command applies to the parameter set determined by the set preselection.Minimum and maximum values are only possible for the recipe parameters.If invalid values are transmitted (impossible laser parameters, limit values exceeded), the relevant OK signal goes to 0 for 50ms (+/-5ms) and then goes back to 1 (prerequisite: integrator parameter No. 17 “OKMode”, bit No. 7 = 1). The invalid parameters are rejected.

During parameter transmission care must be taken to ensure that the laser control system carries out a limit value check after every parameter. To do this, it uses the laser parameters in the control system at that time. When programming a new laser parameter it must also be ensured that it “fits in” with those already present. To do this, the following is recommended:

- initially overwrite every parameter that is to be changed with a minimum value.

If a parameter is written whose action group is not available, then the LSTAT1 signal goes to 0 until

- a parameter is written whose action group is available or - the corresponding action group is requested and granted or- the mains voltage is switched off.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 21

6.4 USER3B Interface (optional)

The USER3B functionality provides the USER1 interface with further useful features. It can be combined on one connector along with the “USER2A” functionality.For the link to a higher-order control system, the signals have to be routed along a screened cable whose screen is grounded on both sides.The pin assignment can be seen from the diagram No. 13.0277-07-01 in chapter 9 and from the overview at the beginning of this chapter.

6.4.1. Inputs


18 LP2 I Laser parameterset selection 2

Together with LP3, expands the LP0/LP1 signals of USER1 interface with 2 more bits. This means that all recipe sets (1..15) can be copied to the effective set.

7 LP3 I Laser parameterset selection 3

see LP2

19 LL2 I fiber-optic 2 Expands the LL0/LL1 signals by one extra bit. The LL configurations 0..7 can be selected as a result

9 LOFF I Laser off A positive flank at this input indicates that a running laser is switched off. With integrator parameter No. 16 (LOFFCoolCoupl) =1, the cooling is switched off at the same time (after the run-out cooling time)

6.4.2 Outputs


8 FINP2 O Fiber 2 in position Reserved for future expansions

20 FINP3 O Fiber 3 in position Reserved for future expansions

21 LSTAT0 O Laser status 0 On receipt of this signal, depending on the links in in-tegrator parameters No. 51 (LSNRMode) and 52 (LS-WarnMode), various laser conditions can be read off.The LSTAT0 is 1 is everything is ok. It is 0 when one of the links has responded (if, for example, the maximum lamp pulse number has been exceeded).

6.4.3 Power supplies

Refer to chapter 6.1 and the diagram No. 13.0277-07-01 in chapter 9.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 22

6.5 USER4A/5A Interfaces (options)

The USER4A interface provides improved integration of the laser into a higher-order machine. It provides the possibility of switching the laser on externally (through 2 potential-free closer contacts). It can be combined on one single connector along with the “USER3B” functionality.The closer contact of the USER4A and USER5A emergency-off button can be used a message contact, e.g. for an SPS control system. The USER5A interface is intended for all such applications where exter-nal switching on of the laser is not planned, but where a message contact on the internal emergency-off switch is wanted.

6.5.1 Operation

The interlock key switch has the following positions:

Position of IL key Meaning

I remote interlock circuit closed, possible to switch on laser from USER4A interface, USER1 interface released

I local interlock circuit closed, possible to switch on laser only from operating panel, USER1 interface blocked. Key can be removed

O local interlock circuit open, laser not ready to be switched on, USER1 interface blocked. Key can be removed

In addition, this key switch has the same functions as those provided in the standard design.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 23

6.5.2 Integration

6.5.2.1 USER4A connections


1 LONSEXT0 O Laser on switch external 0 External laser on contact1st closing connection 1

13 LONSEXT 1 I Laser on switch external 1 External laser on contact1st closing connection 2

2 LONSEXT2 O Laser on switch external 2 External laser on contact2nd closing connection 1

14 LONSEXT3 I Laser on switch external 3 External laser on contact2nd closing connection 2

3 ESTOP2A O E-Stop switch Internal emergency-off switch2nd closing connection 1

15 ESTOP2B I E-Stop switch Internal emergency-off switch2nd closing connection 2

Power supplies:

See chapter 6.1

6.5.2.2 USER5A connections


1 NC

13 NC

2 NC

14 NC

3 ESTOP2A O E-Stop switch Internal emergency-off switch2nd closing connection 1

15 ESTOP2B I E-Stop switch Internal emergency-off switch2nd closing connection 2

Power supplies:

See chapter 6.1


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 24

6.5.2.3 Possibilities

Along with the USER4A interface the following ways of integrating the laser into an installation are avail-able.

Function Solution

External mains power On/Off External power protectionThe mains switch on the laser remains switched onIf required, the local mains switch can be locked in the Off position.

External emergency-off contact Connection to X50 “System”1 S + 1 O

Internal emergency-off switch has an effect on the installation

Free contacts of the internal emergency-off switch on X50“SYSTEM” (ESTOP2C...ESTOP2F)

External interlock circuit Connection to X50 “System”

Block interlock locally Turn interlock key switch to “0 local”and remove the key

Switch off the laser from outside Signal LOFF on X51 “USER3B”An option is that the cooling is switched off

Switch off the laser locally Possible at all times with the laser off key on the operating panel

Switch on the laser from outside “USER4A”, signals LONSEXT0...3. For this, the in-terlock key switch has to be in position “I remote”

Switch on the laser locally Laser-on key on the operating panel. The interlock key switch must be in one of the “local” positions

Switch off the cooling from outside Signal LOFF on X51 “USER1”IP No. 16 “LOFFCoolCoupl” = 1 (yes)The laser is switched off and the cooling as well after the run-out cooling timeif the laser has already been switched off, the cool-ing switches off immediatelyThe interlock key switch has to be in the “I remote” position

Message contact of the internal emergency-off switch

ESTOP2A and ESTOP2B contact on USER4A and USER5A

Switch on the cooling from outside Actuate contacts LONSEXT0...3 at “USER4A” (wiper)The interlock key switch has to be in the “I remote” position

Blocking the USER1/3B signals Interlock key switch in one of the “local” positions interrupts the RC signal from “USER1”


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 25

Function Solution

Acknowledgement for mains On/Off 24VINT on X51 “USER1”

Acknowledgement for cooling On/Off Signal LSTAT0 at “USER3B”IP No. 51 “LSNRMode” = 24 decimal / 18 hex

Acknowledgement for laser On/Off Signals LSTAT0 and OK (“USER1”)IP No. 51 “LSNRMode” = 62 decimal / 3 hex

Acknowledgement for laser = ok Signal OK at “USER1”

Comment: the LSTAT0 signal is available from NLS SW version 48 and higher.See documents 32.1942-06-01 and 32.1942-07-01/05 in chapter 9 for diagrams and sequences.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 26

6.6 USER 6, Multiple processing stations (optional)

6.6.1 Brief description and safety

6.6.1.1 Brief description

The standard equipment of the laser source assumes that a working room that can be opened or closed is available. When using several fiber-optic cables with energy or time sharing, several processing sta-tions are frequently operated independent of one another. It is a requirement that work can be done at one station while new parts are loaded or a new setup done at the other station. It is for this purpose that the USER6 option was provided.Solution concept:

• 1 fiber shutter per fiber-optic cable: for every fiber-optic cable a fiber shutter is installed upstream of the fiber-optic connector. This solution covers all cases, including energy sharing.

Example: SLS with 2 times 50%/50% that are routed to three workstations.

This means that it is possible for one processing station to be working while the corresponding fiber-optic cables and processing heads are connected and the processing space is closed, and this independent of the condition of the other processing stations. For example

• WS1 can be in operation when LL3 and/or LL4 are removed and dummy plug inserted. Comment: the laser has to be switched off to insert the dummy plug.• WS1 can be in operation when WS2 and or WS3 are being opened.• Service condition for only 1 WS for example (laser operation with processing space open)• If the fiber-optic cable is damaged, the laser is switched off. But after a dummy plug has been in-

stalled for the fiber-optic cable, the other processing stations can continue to resonators.

The following concept assumes class 1 systems are being used. However, fiber shutters are also required for class 4 systems that are operated separately from one another on a laser.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 09

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 29.indd

Laser mitNormal-Shutter

2 fachTime share

50 %50 %

50 %50 %

4 Fiber-Shutter

LL 1

LL 2

LL 3

LL 4

WSM BearbeitungsstationWork Station WS1

WS2

WS3


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 27

6.6.1.2 Structure

A total system consists of the following elements:

1. SLS 200 or SLS 200C laser source with the corresponding fiber-optic cable configuration, the fiber-optic cables and processing heads ((Lasag standard)

2. USER6 option from Lasag with the following components • Fiber shutter with absorber, one for each fiber-optic cable • Print LLOS21 instead of the standard print LLOS2, in the optical system • X53 USER6 connector with internal laser cabling • New designations for the positions of the LC key3. Workstation Manager (WSM), with connecting cables, to be created by the system integrator4. Several processing stations with independent processing spaces

1 Laser source USER6 option2 Fiber-optic cable, e.g. two to each processing station

3 Electrical connections4 Workstation Manager (WSM)5 Processing station (WS)

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 10

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 30.indd

WS2

WS1 WSM SLS 200

2

3 3

3

4

5

2

3

1

WS32

2

5

5


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 28

6.6.1.3 WSM Concept

It is the responsibility of the system integrator to create the Workstation Manager (WSM). The WSM interfaces to the individual processing stations have to be designed in such a way that they correspond to the interfaces of the laser source, i.e. same connector type and same pin assignment. This ensures that an individual processing station can be connected to a laser and that it will work correctly. Equally, a Lasag service technician can also easily check the interface and the functions between WSM and WS in this case. The WS software will also not differ, no matter whether the WS is connected to a WSM or to a laser source.

The attached documents assume that the same connectors are used and give the pin assignment of these connectors. For the connector numbers, the number of the processing station is prefixed with the hundreds number, so connector X50 for WS2 has the number X250 for example. This means that the at-tached documents can be easily and almost completely adopted.

To what extent the 24 V power supplies are independent of one another depends on the grounding con-cept.

For practical purposes, the WSM accesses the SW interlock signals of the WS in order to create an interlock status indication and to generate the beam blocking signals. Trouble-shooting becomes very difficult without clear status indication from the WSM.

6.6.1.4 Safety notices for the user and service staff

DANGER

The emergency-off switch of the laser source acts only on the laser source. Pay attention to the integrator's emergency-off concept

WARNING ABOUT LASER RADIATION

• Do not confuse fiber-optic cables

• Laser source beam blocking is implemented with the LC key on the laser source. This closes the (main) shutter of the laser source, i.e. all processing stations are blocked. The LC key must be in the WS position for operation to begin (special designation for USER6).

• Beam blocking for an individual processing station is implemented by the system in-tegrator on the WSM or at the processing station and it must be used -accordingly.

NOTE

• All errors in the WSM and WS interlock circuit are indicated by the laser with “I01 E-Stop ext”.

• As for trouble-shooting on interface X53, the SYSTEM signals can also be measured on X50.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 29

6.6.1.5 Safety notices for the Integrator

DANGER

• Work to be done in accordance with these instructions, especially the interlock circuits and other safety elements.

• Testing of the safety equipment to be done during commissioning and regular main-tenance.

• Make sure that the fiber-optic cables have not been mixed up, cover connectors if necessary.

6.6.2 X53 USER6 Signal description

6.6.2.1 The functions of the fiber shutter

The function of several, independent processing stations is made possible by an additional beam shut-ter, the so-called FISH (Fiber SHutter) , upstream of every connection to a fiber-optic cable.Every fiber shutter has an interlock contact that is closed when the fiber shutter is closed for the laser beam. In addition, the open and closed positions are monitored by sensors and a functional check and the SW-IL signal are derived from it.The fiber shutter is driven in principle by the NLS in that it is opened as soon as the fiber-optic cable is driven. But it can also be closed by the WSM with the FISCCx signal.If a fiber-optic cable is active, i.e. fiber-optic cable actuated and fiber shutter open, the LED of the fiber-optic cable connector and of the FISOx signal output is active.As usual, a dummy plug can be installed instead of the fiber-optic cable for the inactive fiber-optic cable sockets.

6.6.2.2 The X53 USER6 Signals

Signal I/O Values x MeaningWSSILx O x=0....6 Software interlock, powered by internal 24VWSHILx x=0....6 Hardware interlock, requires potential-free contactsFISCCx I x=1....6 FISH close command, closes the fiber shutter, external 24VFISOx O x=1....6 FISH open, fiber shutter is open, external 24V

See also the diagrams in chapter 9 on this point.

6.6.2.3 No laser pulses when switching the fiber shutter

When switching the fiber shutter the laser must not be pulsing unless the main beam shutter is closed. When changing the LL status and switching movement modules the laser control system carries out this monitoring. However, when changing the FISCCx signals, the external control system must ensure that the laser does not pulse onto the switched fiber shutters during this time. A distinction can be made be-tween the following conditions:

Process by FISCCx Condition ActionFiber shutter is closing FISOx active Prevent lasering, 200 ms HALT

FISOx not active No laser suppression necessaryFiber shutter is opening Corresponding WS active Prevent lasering, HALT until FISOx=1

Corresponding WSx not active No laser suppression necessary


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 30

6.6.2.4 The function of the fiber shutter in detail:

Comment: the letter x stands for one of the six fiber-optic cable outlets.

1. The FISHx opens when DEFx is active and FISCCx is not active. By choosing the LL conditions, e.g. with signal LLx from User1 or USER3B, the NLS makes the cor-

responding DEF signals active and the corresponding fiber outlets automatically become - active as a result. With the FISCCx signals the user has the possibility of blocking outputs that would be active otherwise.

2. LEDx lights up and FISOx is active when FISHx is open and ALLINP is active. An open FISHx is indicated by a lit LED and an active FISOx output signal. The linking with the ALLINP

signal has occurred in order to indicate the wait time when switching the movement modules, i.e. during a change of the LL condition the FISOx signal only becomes active when the movement mod-ules have reached the new position.

3. When the LEDx is not lit, the ILFIBx has been short-circuited and a dummy plug on the fiber-optic cable x has been accepted.

4. If an error occurs in the FISH, the ALLINP signal is discontinued and the laser switched off. The fol-lowing is monitored as an error in the FISH: both limit switches are active simultaneously, the setpoint position is not reached after 150 ms.

5. To make trouble-shooting easier, three LEDs are present for every FISH on the print LLOS21: limit switch closed, limit switch open, FISH control for opening.

The diagrams for this can be found in the service file in chapter 18.

6.6.3 Requirements of processing stations (WS) and Workstation Manager (WSM)

DANGER

In general, chapter 5.2 must be read for the connections of the SYSTEM group.

Comment: below the letter x stands for one of the six fiber-optic cable outputs, y for one of the processing stations.

6.6.3.1 Emergency-off concept

The emergency-off concept is used as the basis for the interlock circuits. This has to be created by the system integrator. Considerations on this can be found in chapter 5. In the text below it is assumed that the individual processing stations are independent, i.e. each one has its own emergency-off switch, and that pressing the emergency-off button on one processing station only switches off the laser if this sta-tion is active, i.e. laser processing is possible. Furthermore, the circuits for switching off the handling system etc. are not indicated.Pressing the emergency-off switch on the laser source switches off only the laser source. If other ma-chines are to be shut down, then the user emergency-off contacts are available for this purpose.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 31

6.6.3.2 Beam blocking locally for an individual WS

The local function of the beam block must be generated by the WSM. The function is as follows:when the processing hood is open and the laser on, then the FISCCx signal must be activated and - as soon as the FISOx disappears - the beam blocked lamp (SHCLy signal) must also be activated at the corresponding processing station.With the laser off (standby) the FISH should remain open so that the pilot laser can be used.

6.6.3.3 Service function with class 4 laser

If this service function is required, an interlock bridge must be provided. Regulations must be complied with for this. The bridging can be provided in various ways, e.g.

1. With a service key on the WSM. The laser warning lamp should flash. Note: FDA does not accept the key alone.

2. Bridge for the interlock switch with conspicuous safety notice.

See the comments in the safety regulations.

6.6.3.4 Special requirements of the WS processing stations

The emergency-off button of the WS requires both a make and a break contact.In addition to the usual equipment of the WS the displays are also required:

1. Laser on lamp, green, indicates when the processing station is active with the laser switched on. This display also indicates error conditions during laser operation when it flashes.

2. Beam block lamp, white with special logo, indicates when the laser beam is blocked with the fiber shutter for this processing station.

3. Laser warning lamp, yellow, indicates the service condition, provided this is to be fitted.

6.6.4 Creation of the interlock circuits and the other functions of the SYSTEM group

6.6.4.1 Creation of the interlock circuits

The diagrams in chapter 9 show how the circuits are created for different models of multiple processing stations.

6.6.4.2 Testing the safety functions

Before the installation is put into operation, a comprehensive review of the safety functions must be car-ried out.

6.6.4.3 Creating the other functions of X50 SYSTEM

The standard design is not to connect the cooling to the WSM, but directly to the laser at connector X50 SYSTEM. On this point, refer to diagram 34.1075-02-03 or also to 13.0277-05 as an alternative for the cooling system, both in chapter 9. It must be ensured that the cooling is running when the laser is switched on (feed-in concept). Optionally, an operating terminal with emergency-off switch can also be connected. Refer to the same diagram.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 32

6.6.4.4 Creating the other functions of X50 SYSTEM

On this point please refer to diagram 34.1075-03-04 in chapter 9. The following functions are outlined here.

The following are necessary:

• Laser on lamp, connected with LONL when WS is active.• Beam block lamp, signal generated by WSM. The SHCL signal from X53 is not used.

The following are optional:• User emergency-off, depending on the interlock concept• Laser warning lamp to display the service condition of this WS. If this is not necessary, then it can

also be connected with LWARNL when the WS is active in order to display when the laser is switched on.

• Gas valve connected to GVALVO when the WS is active.

It must be noted that the signals are internal 24V signals. The SHCL signal, beam block lamp, is not used.

6.6.5 USER and COM interfaces

The USER1 signals from X51 and the various USER options from X53 are to be switched over to the WS that is active in each case, in accordance with the following chapter.Exceptions are the RC and RCA signals that are processed by the WSM, and possibly also the LP0 ... LP3 and LL0 ... LL3 signals.The normal shutter, driven through USER1, continues to be the function shutter during laser processing.

6.6.6 WSM: The active processing station

6.6.6.1 Selecting the active processing station

A processing station is active when the conditions for laser processing are given and are monitored accordingly. With the active processing station, the green laser on lamp lights up provided the laser has been switched on. With the laser off, the activity can be identified on the processing station's hand-held terminal and on the LED of the fiber-optic cable input.In the standard case, one or none of the processing stations is always active. This case is dealt with below. The special case where several processing stations are active at the same time - using energy sharing - will be described at the end in a separate section.The allocation of the activity is taken care of by the WSM.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 33

6.6.6.2 Assigning activity

A processing station WSy requests activity with the RCy signal. The WSM responds to this request as follows:• If none of the other processing stations are active, then the WSM allocates the activity to it.• If another processing station is active, then the allocation is postponed until the other processing

station has stopped its activity. An installation-specific priority regulation can be introduced. The standard is the “first come first served” waiting queue.

• The RCAy signal is confirmation of the assigned activity.

A processing station relinquishes activity by removing RCy. Normally, the WSM should not withdraw the activity from a processing station by itself. Otherwise, this would have to be provided specifically in the program for the processing station. Equally conceivable in such a case is an additional signal, e.g. on X51/10, by means of which a processing station could force the WSM to assign the activity to it.

6.6.6.3 Sequence

1. WSy sends RCy, or it if it has already been sent earlier and another WS was active: the other WS relinquishes its activity.

2. The WSM selects the appropriate LL condition for WSy and waits for the FINP1 confirmation from the laser.

3. The WSM selects the laser parameters providing they are not the same for all WS or are selected by the WS themselves. In the standard case the WSM selects the LPy laser parameters and waits for RCA confirmation.

4. The WSM allocates the activity to the WSy with the following functions:• Control the laser-on lamp, i.e. connect LONLy to LONL • Control the gas valve, i.e. connect GVALVOy to GVALVO (optional)• Control USER1y, i.e. connect all signals from USER1y to USER1, apart from RCy and RCAy. Also

the signals from USER3C providing they are required.• Drive COM1y, i.e. connect COM1y to COM1. An option if the processing station above it wants to

select the laser parameters.• Drive COM2y, i.e. connect COM2y to COM2. An option if every processing station has an operat-

ing terminal that is active whenever the processing station is active• Set RCAy signal to active

WSM checks constantly that it has the laser's RCA. It is disappears, the WSM switches to the error condi-tion and removes the RCA from the active WS.

6.6.6.4 The case in which no processing station is active

If a processing station relinquishes its activity without a request to do so being received, then the condi-tion “no processing station active” is produced. In this case the WSM maintains the last fiber-optic cable status and closes the fiber shutters of the active fiber-optic cables.

6.6.6.5 Several processing stations simultaneously active with energy sharing

This case is only a special case with respect to activity assignment, but not with respect to the interlock-ing diagram. In normal circumstances, all processing stations in this condition and linked together with energy sharing will simultaneously be active and process. For the purposes of maintenance and setup, a processing station can be switched off by switching off the corresponding fiber shutter. The processing station triggers this with the WSM by removing the RCy signal.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 34

6.6.7 Operating principle of the interlock circuits of multiple processing stations

6.6.7.1 Overview of the complete interlock circuit

6.6.7.2 Details of the LC key

With multiple processing stations the LC key on the laser operating panel loses the significance of the laser class and will be given a new designation for this reason.“WS” (standard designation 4) The key must be in this position to allow the pro-

cessing stations to be switched on. Note: when switching on, the beam blocking position must be set (=1).

“Beam blocking indication” (standard designation 1) In this position the key can be withdrawn e.g. dur-ing maintenance of the laser. When this is the case, the local beam blocking display lights up and the laser beam is blocked at the normal shutter, i.e. all processing stations are protected against laser radiation from the fiber-optic cables.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 11

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 37.indd

24V Speisung24V Supply

Interlock für bis zu sechs Bearbeitungsstationen (WS), in Serie verbunden,Anschluss an Stelle oder zusätzlich des externen Not-AusInterlock for up to six workstations (WS), serially connected, signal of external emergency stop

Normal-shutter

Der Kontakt WRE Bearbeitungsraum ist fest offenThis workstation contact is fix open

LC-Schlüssel: geschlossen in Pos. 4: Bearbeitungsstationen in Betrieb offen in Pos. 1: Strahlsperre mit Normalshutter für

alle BearbeitungsstationenLC-key: closed in pos. 4: workstations are operating

open in pos. 1 beam blocked at normal shutter forall workstations

WRE

Interlock fürbis zu sechsLichtleiterInterlock for fibers up to 6

Service-Schlüssel, im Servicezustand geschlossenService-key, closed in service position

zum Sicherheitsrelaisto safety relay


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 35

6.6.7.3 Dummy plug for fiber-optic cable connector

A fiber can be replaced by a dummy plug in the cases of time and energy sharing. If this fiber is driven wrongly, the laser switches off.

• The HW interlock is bridged with the dummy plug.• The SW interlock signal ILFIB is created in the control system (LLOS21 print)when the appropriate

fiber is not being driven or then the corresponding LL shutter is closed.

6.6.7.4 Hardware interlock, opener contacts, one fiber per processing station

Comment: in this circuit the emergency stop is only for this processing station. It does not affect the laser if the appropriate fiber shutter is closed.

6.6.7.5 Hardware interlock, several fibers to the same processing station

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 38.indd

Fibershutter, zuwenn Shutter zuFiber shutter closedwhen shutter closed

Interlock

Not-Aus bei Bearbeitungsstation, zu wenn nicht aktiviertEmergency Stop at WS, closed when not activated

LaserquelleLaser source

BearbeitungsstationWorkstation



Bearbeitungsraum, zu wenn Tür geschlossenWorking room, closed when door is closed



Fiber shutter 1

Interlock

Fiber shutter 3

Fiber shutter 2

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 38.indd

Fibershutter, zuwenn Shutter zuFiber shutter closedwhen shutter closed

Interlock









Fiber shutter 1

Interlock

Fiber shutter 3

Fiber shutter 2


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 36

6.6.7.6 Software interlock, closing contacts, one fiber per processing station

The following signals, connections and logic may be generated in part by a control system e.g. SPS.

6.6.7.7 Software interlock, several fibers to the same processing station

The following signals, connections and logic may be generated in part by a control system e.g. SPS.

Comment: The interface connections to a processing station are the same irrespective of how many fibers go to this station.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 13

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 39.indd

Fibershutter, offenwenn Shutter zu

Fiber shutter openwhen shutter closed

Fibershutter, offenwenn Shutter zuFiber shutter openwhen shutter closed

Signal ESTOPE

Not-Aus bei WS offenwenn nicht aktiviertEmergency Stop at WSopen when not activated

Bearbeitungsraumoffen wenn Türe zuWorking room open when door is closed



24 VDC, NLS

Signal ESTOPE

24 VDC, NLS

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 13

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 39.indd

Fibershutter, offenwenn Shutter zu

Fiber shutter openwhen shutter closed

Fibershutter, offenwenn Shutter zuFiber shutter openwhen shutter closed

Signal ESTOPE





24 VDC, NLS

Signal ESTOPE

24 VDC, NLS


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 37

6.7 USER7A, USER8A, USER9A, Fast Shutter (optional)

Only the Fast Shutter 31.1272 (delivered until Nov. 2004) can be driven by the USER7A and USER8A inter-faces. The description of these interfaces can be found in document 31.1272-07.The Fast Shutter FSH/04 32.2085 has been delivered since December 2004. It is driven by the USER9A interface that is described in this chapter. The USER9A interface is located at the X52 or X53 connector position. Because of the limited number of connections, it can be combined with the USER4A or with USER5A interface.It is not possible to drive the fast shutter via the serial interface. Feedback is also received only via the USER9A interface. No feedback or status messages are received from the fast shutter via the serial in-terfaces.If no signals are applied to the USER9A, the fast shutter is in the open condition.

6.7.1 Signals

USER9A (Harting connector, 24-pin, sockets on laser side, X52 or X53 plug position)

Pin Signal Designation Meaning

4 FSCC Fast Shutter Close Command

InputBy applying +24V to this signal the fast shutter is made to close. To ensure that the signal is reliably identified, a minimum dura-tion of 200 µs is required.ATTENTION: the fast shutter may even react with signal lengths of 20 µs (not guaranteed).

16 FSNO Fast Shutter Not Open

OutputThis signal is always at +24V when the fast shutter is not open. Not open means: closed or moving


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 38


6 ERR Limit/Error OutputIndicates that the the fast shutter is momentarily in an overload phase, or else it has identified an error (e.g. sensor signals, fly-ing time exceeded).As long as the ERR signal is at +24V for less than 500 ms, then this is only overload information and it should not bring about a reaction on the processing machine.During an overload phase the fast shutter cannot be closed.If it is closed shortly after an overload phase, then there is a risk of it going into overload again after a short period of time (refer also to chapter 7.6.2.2).

11 GNDext Ground external InputApply the ground of the external interface power supply here.

12 GNDint Ground internal OutputGND of the internal laser power supply. In simple cases it can be used to supply the interface

23 +24Vext +24V external InputApply the +24V of the external interface power supply here.

24 +24Vint +24V internal Output+24V of the internal laser power supply. In simple cases it can be used to supply the interface

X51 USER1 (Harting connector, 24-pin, sockets on laser side)After the installation of a fast shutter, the following signals of the USER1 interface take on a new meaning in part


18 SO Shutter Is Open OutputThis signal indicates - as it did before - the open condition of the safety beam shutter. If the safety beam shutter is in substitute mode for the fast shutter (overload phase), the SO signal does not change, it remains at +24V. As a result, a connected control system is not irritated by the substitute operation and the SO signal behaves as expected.

21 WP Working Pulse OutputThe WP output provides only new pulses when both beam shut-ters are open together. If one of the beam shutters is closed, the WP signal is at 0 V


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 39

6.7.2 Sequences

6.7.2.1 Closing and opening the fast shutter

This diagram clearly shows that the actuation of the fast shutter only makes sense when the safety beam switch is open. It is assumed here that the fast shutter does not exceed the maximum “closed time” and that no overload situation with substitute operation by the safety beam shutter is present.

6.7.2.2 Exceeding the max. “closed time”

If the fast shutter is to remain closed for an extended period of time, there is the risk of it being damaged. To avoid this, the safety beam shutter closes after 500 ms max. (maximum “closed time”) and the fast shutter opens by itself. During the cooling down phase the ERR signal indicates this “substitute opera-tion”.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 07

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 26.indd

32.2085 10 01.xls

E< Ehyst Ehyst < E < Emax

FSCC

F-Shutter offen / open

zu / closed

FSNO

SOC

Shutter offen / open

zu / closed

SOmax. 20ms

FSCC


zu / closed

FSNO

ERR

SOC


zu / closed

Emax>E>Ehyst E<EhystE erhöht sich bis zu EmaxE arising up to Emax

Einl.zeitwarm-up time

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 07

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 26.indd

32.2085 10 01.xls

E< Ehyst Ehyst < E < Emax

FSCC


zu / closed

FSNO

SOC


zu / closed

SOmax. 20ms

FSCC


zu / closed

FSNO

ERR

SOC


zu / closed

Emax>E>Ehyst E<EhystE erhöht sich bis zu EmaxE arising up to Emax

Einl.zeitwarm-up time


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 40

If the fast shutter is to be opened again, it closes first, the safety beam shutter opens, the laser is en-abled, the running time is counted down and the fast shutter is then opened.. This process requires about 200 ms, compared to a max. 10 ms for a normal fast shutter to open.The acknowledgement signals show that these processes only take place internally, at the interfaces, but nothing of them can be seen. For this reason, a controlling SPS does not have to take care of this because the fast shutter (FSNO = 1) remains closed for the SPS during this complete period of time. It must only be borne in mind that it will take longer to open the fast shutter in this case.The cooling down period depends on the maximum average laser power and it can be taken from the following table:

FSH/04 Plaser DC Cooling down time (ms)

Hyst (ms)

<=50W 100% 1 1

<=65W 50% 500 15

<=75W 33.3% 1000 30

<=100W 25% 1500 45

<=120W 20% 2000 60

<=150W 12.5% 3500 105

<=220W 8.3% 5500 165

<=300W 5% 9500 285

>300W 0% infinite infinite

NFS/07 ≤=600W 100% 1 1

Plaser maximum average laser power that can affect the fast shutter (dependent on type of laser)

DC max. duty cycle with which the fast shutter can be operated (always applies even if the max. closed time is not reached)

Cooling down time time that the fast shutter needs to cool down after reaching max. closed time. After this time, it is able again to close for 500 ms

Hyst duration of the overload phase (is indicated by ERR). The fast shutter can be closed after this time at the earliest, but there is the risk of it going back into the overload condition again very quickly.

Example:

A fast shutter is built into a KLS246-102. The average laser power is max. 75W. This produces a duty cycle of 33%.The lower section of the diagram below shows a possible processing sequence. The energy balance is shown in the top half.It can be seen that the maximum energy is reached 500 ms after closing the fast shutter and the fast shutter is at the threshold of an overload. But since it is opened again, it can cool down, i.e. the energy is dissipated. An overload is avoided.If it is closed again, the energy balance rises again, only to drop again after the fast shutter is opened.With this laser the cooling down time is twice as long as the heating up time. So if the fast shutter remains open on average for double the length of time it is closed, the energy balance is stable and never reaches overload (duty cycle max. 33%). If the max. duty cycle is not adhered to, then the maximum energy is exceeded and an overload phase follows as a result.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 41

6.7.2.3 Opening / closing the safety beam shutter

This is done in the normal way through USER1 signals (e.g. SOC). In these cases there is no automatic running-in of the laser after the beam shutter movement. The user himself must ensure that the fast shut-ter is open (if so required).

6.7.2.4 Processing sequence

• Positioning• Close the fast shutter • Open the safety beam shutter• Wait out the running-in time (100ms)• Open the fast shutter • Processing - close fast shutter - re-position - open fast shutter - process - etc.• Close the safety beam shutter

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 08

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 28.indd

32.2085 10 02.xls

Energie-Aufbau/-Abbau bei Fast-Shutter-BewegungenEnergy-build-up/ -reduction during Fast shutter movements

Emax

Ehyst

E Bsp. mit TAbbau = 2* TAufbau

E.g. with Treduction = 2* Tbuild-up

E = 0

Fast-Shutter offen / open

Fast-Shutter geschlossen / closed

Bearbeitungsreihenfolge / Treatment sequence

PositioningTreatment

SOC

S-Shutter open

closed ca. 100ms ca. 100ms

SO

WP

FSCC mind. 100ms

F-Shutter open

closed max. 20ms

max. 10msFSNO

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rthe

rmor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtra

ut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nic

ht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

B lat tDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 06 08

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 06 28.indd

32.2085 10 02.xls

Energie-Aufbau/-Abbau bei Fast-Shutter-BewegungenEnergy-build-up/ -reduction during Fast shutter movements

Emax

Ehyst

E Bsp. mit TAbbau = 2* TAufbau

E.g. with Treduction = 2* Tbuild-up

E = 0

Fast-Shutter offen / open

Fast-Shutter geschlossen / closed

Bearbeitungsreihenfolge / Treatment sequence

PositioningTreatment

SOC

S-Shutter open

closed ca. 100ms ca. 100ms

SO

WP

FSCC mind. 100ms

F-Shutter open

closed max. 20ms

max. 10msFSNO


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 42

6.8 WIMP Controller (optional)

The WIMP controller 32.2094 allows the OK signal and additional functions to be adjusted:

At USER1 interface pin 10 the WIMP signal (Working IMP) is available, having beenoptically decou-pled. As a result, those laser pulses that are created with open beam shutter are shown. The WIMP signal corresponds to the logical AND link of the IMP1 and SO signals.

At USER1 interface pin 22 the LVOK signal is available, having been optically decoupled. It signals that the laser has been switched on (laser power supply OK).

The precise description of the WIMP Controller is stored on the attached CD as document 32.2094-10-01/15.

6.9 Synchronising the laser pulses of several lasers

All descriptions in this chapter refer to diagram 13.0277-14-01 Synchronisation of several lasers, which can be found in chapter 9.

6.9.1 General

In stand-alone mode, the pulse frequency of the laser corresponds to the frequency value given on the operating terminal, i.e. the internal frequency.But an external frequency can also be set for the laser using the USER1 interface of the laser control system. In this way it is possible to synchronise the laser not only with other machines but also with other lasers. It is also possible to trigger external devices to the laser. The signal required to do this is also provided via the USER1 interface.

The general procedure for synchronising the laser to an external frequency is as follows:

1. request the action group of the USER1 interface (RC)2. Await acknowledgement (RCA)3. Change over to external frequency of USER1 interface (RF)

The command to switch to the external frequency is allocated to action group 2. If the switchover to the external frequency is to be done via USER1 interface, then it must also have the right over this action group. Only then will the switchover be implemented. If the the menu 2 Processing a connected operating terminal is already occupying action group 2, it is not possible to switch over using the USER1 interface. In this case, the action on the terminal must first be released.In order to be sure that the changeover to external is really possible, the acknowledgement (RCA) must be awaited after the request to change has been made. This provides information on whether the USER1 interface has obtained the action group 2. If the right is relinquished during the synchronisation to exter-nal, an immediate changeover to the internal frequency indicated on the terminal takes place.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 43

6.9.2 Types of synchronisation

A distinction can be made between two types of synchronisation:

Synchronisation Master: all lasers are synchronised with one another with this type of synchronisa-tion. One of the lasers assumes the roll of master and gives the timing pulses to the slaves.

Synchronisation SPS/CNC: with this type of synchronisation all the lasers, including the master, are syn-chronised to an external trigger signal. This signal can be generated by and SPS or CNC for example.

6.9.3 Cabling

Both types of synchronisation are possible with the cabling shown in the diagram. If the SPS/CNC syn-chronisation is not required, then the connection indicated with dotted lines can be omitted.With this cabling proposal the USER1 interfaces of all lasers are power externally, namely from the SPS/CNC. This means that there is an electrical disconnection between the lasers and the SPS/CNC.

6.9.4 Principle of Synchronisation

All slaved lasers are set to the external frequency (RF at +24V). They obtain the signal that they synchro-nise with (FP) from the master (FP). As soon as the right to action group 2 is obtained at USER1 interface, the slaves automatically switch to the frequency set by the master.If the master now works with an internal frequency, all slaves are also synchronised to this frequency. All laser pulse at the same frequency, which is the one set by the master. This is the Synchronisation Mas-ter.But the master can also be switched to an external frequency via the USER interface. In our case this now comes from the SPS/CNC.If the master is synchronised to the SPS/CNC frequency, all the slaves are also synchronised to the SPS/CNC.

Signal description

Signal Name DescriptionRC remote control This signal requests the right to action group 2. The con-

firmation of the lasers follows individually (RCA).RF remote frequency The changeover of the laser to the frequency of the TP

signal is done with the RF signal. FP firing pulse Laser output signal which allows the external devices to

synchronise themselves to the laser.RCA (Master) remote control accepted Acknowledgement of the master to the RC signalRCA (Slave1) remote control accepted Acknowledgement of the slave 1 to the RC signalTP trigger pulse During synchronisation via USER1 interface this signal

is triggered.GND/+24V Power supply of the laser's USER1 interfaces


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 06 - 44

6.9.5 Other comments on the combined operation of several lasers

6.9.5.1 Safety circuits, X50 System connector

If several lasers are working inside the same processing installation, special attention must be paid to the connections of the processing hood and the emergency-off circuits. Refer to chapter 6 on this point.

6.9.5.2 Other functions

There are ways of implementing separate and combined control of the other functions of the user inter-faces. Combined control of the inputs and separate evaluation of the outputs is also possible.

6.9.5.3 Terminals and connection to user interfaces COM1 to COM4

The user interfaces COM1 and COM4 are to be operated separately. It is recommended that a dedicated terminal is connected for each laser even if it is basically possible to switch over a terminal to the various lasers.


A COMPANY OF THE



7 Setup and settingsof the laser control system

86 . 0651 - 07 - 01

7 Setup and settings of the laser control system

Only the correct setup, setting and calibration of the laser installation guarantee operation that is problem-free and in line with expectations.

Table of contents

7.1 Calibration of the energy measurement 27.1.1 General 27.1.2 Material 27.2.3 Checking the level control of the beam detector 27.1.4 Determination of the energy calibration multiplier for standard KLS 246, SLS 200 and FLS N 37.1.5 Determination of the energy calibration multiplier for KLS 246-040 FC 3

7.2 Adjustment of the energy control and of the halt compensation 47.2.1 Mode of operation 47.2.2 Description of integrator parameters 47.2.3 Adjustment of the control slope with IP 27 = E_Slope 47.2.4 Definition of the control limits / process limits 57.2.5 Adjustment of the noise limitation IP 57 = NoiseCut 57.2.6 Halt compensation 67.2.7 Messages during the control process 67.2.8 Aids for checking the control system 7


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 07 - 02

7.1 Calibration of the energy measurement

7.1.1 General

The laser must be optimally adjusted before the energy calibration is run.The laser is calibrated with the standard resonator and with built-in beam splitter plate and beam expander, but without an additional lens (such as the BAK etc.).The laser is calibrated when warmed up (after 10 minutes of operation).

7.1.2 Material

Energy measuring instrument or power measuring instrument for KLS 246-040 FC.Oscilloscope with BNC connection cable.A pocket calculator may also be needed.Final test report on the corresponding laser source (ATP).

7.2.3 Checking the level control of the beam detector

1. Set the effective parameters on the adjusted laser.

KLS 246/ SLS200/FLSx42N

FLSx52N KLS 246-040 FC

IP 31 = E_Ampl medium (1) medium (1) large (2)

IP 58 = EMWInc 500 µs 500 µs 75 µs

IP 60 = Edisp Format 0 0 1

f: 5 Hz 5Hz 50 Hz

t: 1 ms 1ms 0.3 ms

U: 400 V 635V 400 V

Ud (min) 2 V 2 V 1.8 V

2. Measure the pulse voltage at the detector output X6 of the control unit with the oscilloscope. With the FLSxxxN the signal is routed to X60 of the plug connector plate.

Test 1: Ud = > Ud (min)

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

ASAG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Beila

gen,

die

dem

Em

pfän

ger

pers

önlic

h an

vertr

aut s

ind,

ver

blei

bt je

derz

eit u

nser

er F

irma.

Ohn

e sc

hrift

liche

Gen

ehm

igun

g dü

rfen

sie

nich

t kop

iert,

ver

viel

fälti

gt, a

uch

niem

als

dritt

en P

erso

nen

mitg

etei

lt od

er z

ugän

glic

h ge

mac

ht w

erde

n.©

LAS

AG A

G, T

hun

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 07 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 07 02.indd

Ud

If not, set E_Ampl to large (2)

Test 2: Signal must not go to saturation. This happens when Ud > 9 V. In this case set E_Ampl to medium (1) or small (0)

3. Note to integrator parameter IP 58 EMWIncThis parameter takes account of the fact that the laser pulse lasts longer than the current pulse on the flashlamp.Standard setting is 500. For short pulses up to 100 µs 75 is adequate. A higher value limits the maxi-mum frequency that can be set (message L 10).


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 07 - 03

7.1.4 Determination of the energy calibration multiplier for standard KLS 246, SLS 200 and FLS N

a) Initial value IP 28 = E_Calibr = 100b) Set the laser parameters: f = 10 Hz, t = 1 ms, U = 390 Vc) Let the laser warm up for at least 10 minutes without interruption with the beam shutter closed (en-

ergy indication must be stable). The laser must be at its optimum settings.d) Position the energy measuring equipment at a distance of approx. 200 mm from the KOS interface

plate; measure the energy of 3 single pulses.e) Correct integrator parameter E_Calibr in such a way that the operating panel display corresponds to

the energy measuring instrument.f) Compare the energy indication on the operating panel with that of the energy measuring instrument

(ref).g) Repeat points d) - g) until the deviation between the energy measuring instrument and the operating

panel display is less than 5% (let the laser warm up for about 3 minutes each time).h) Unplug the beam detector input signal on the control unit.i) With the laser switched on and pulsing, check the energy display on the operating panel. The display must be between 0 ... and 0.01J, otherwise there is a fault in the control unit.k) Record the value of E_Calibr in the “Integrator parameters” table.

7.1.5 Determination of the energy calibration multiplier for KLS 246-040 FC

Note 1: the KOS must be equipped with an Ulbricht sphere for low peak power (part No. 34 34.1036).

Note 2: Calibration at high frequencies. When calibrating at frequencies above 10 Hz, then, because of the beam shutter switching time, a power measuring device (medium power) has to be used.

The pulse energy E (pulse) = P(average) / f (Laser) can be calculated from this. Set the beam ex-pander to position 3.

a) Initial value IP 28 = E_Calibr = 100b) Set the laser parameters: f = 1,000 Hz, t = 0.050 ms, U = 250 Vc) Let the laser warm up for at least 10 minutes without interruption with the beam shutter closed

(energy indication must be stable). The laser must be at its optimum settings. Beam expander to position 3.

d) Position the power measuring equipment at a distance of approx. 200 mm from the KOS interface plate. Open the beam shutter, read off the the power on the measuring instrument and calculate the energy.

Note: terminal parameter TP 15 = open shutter without halt.e) Correct integrator parameter E_Calibr in such a way that the operating panel display corresponds to

the measured energy.f) Compare the energy indication on the operating panel with that of the power measuring instrument

(ref).g) Repeat points d) - g) until the deviation is less than 5%.h) Unplug the beam detector input signal on the control unit.i) With the laser switched on and pulsing, check the energy display on the operating panel. The display must be between 0 ... and 10 mJ, otherwise there is a fault in the control unit.k) Record the value of E_Calibr in the “Integrator parameters” table.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 07 - 04

7.2 Adjustment of the energy control and of the halt compensation

Valid for NLS from version 48.

7.2.1 Mode of operation

With the energy control system, the user has a way of controlling the pulse energy of the laser source. As a result, long-term effects, such as flashlamp ageing, but also short-term effects such as a halt, can be compensated. The energy control system refers to the energy setpoint value set by the user in the WPS Edit menu.The control system forms a control difference and corrects the flashlamp voltage from the actual energy value determined by the energy measurement and the energy setpoint value. The control up to a fre-quency of 25 Hz takes place after every pulse, otherwise every 40 ms.

7.2.2 Description of integrator parameters

No. Variable Values for parameter 2 Unit Explanation

IP 27 E_Slope 1..9999(150*) Amplification (slope) of the E-control

IP 57 NoiseCut 0..500000 (0*) µV Noise limitation of the energy measurement

IP 59 HaltComp 0..9999(0*) mV Value of the voltage step per measuring cycle

IP 26 E_Control 1..700(50*) 1/1000 Indicates the tolerance of the E-control

IP 30 VoltTol 0..70(5*) % Indicates the tolerance of the charging voltage

IP 17 OKmode 32 bit (dec 62*) Indicates the conditions with which the USER1 signal OK (AND) is linked.

* = standard value

7.2.3 Adjustment of the control slope with IP 27 = E_Slope

The amplification of the controller can be adjusted with the parameter E_Slope, i.e. how much the con-troller reacts to a given control deviation.When setting this parameter, a compromise between rapid compensation of an energy deviation and control stability has to be found. The standard value is defined in the ATP.

a) Increasing the value for IP 27 • Faster compensation of an energy deviation

• Stability of the control circuit is degraded. In an extreme case, this can lead to violent energy fluctuations.

b) Reducing the value for IP 27 • Slower compensation of an energy deviation • Stability of the control circuit is improved


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 07 - 05

7.2.4 Definition of the control limits / process limits

To guarantee perfect operation of the energy control system, the control limits of the lamp voltage have to be defined. The limits depend on the pulse length as well as the pulse frequency and, where necessary, they have to be adapted when these parameters are changed. The minimum/maximum voltage values of the WPS (= effective parameter set) are used as the control limits.

Procedure:a) Make sure that the energy control system is switched off.b) Set the pulse frequency, pulse duration and voltage in accordance with the application.c) Definition of the minimum voltage value: 50 V lower than the setpoint value, but not lower than

the permissible system value.d) Definition of the maximum voltage value: increase the lamp voltage until a drop in the laser

energy occurs (dependent on resonator). Define this value as the maximum voltage value. With stan-dard resonators, the system limit value is usually reached earlier, and this value is then considered as the maximum value.

e) Set the limit values in the corresponding recipe set. Before processing, select this recipe set as the valid working parameter set (WPS). Remark: the limit values can only be set in the corresponding recipe and not directly in the WPS.

7.2.5 Adjustment of the noise limitation IP 57 = NoiseCut

With the NoiseCut parameter, the stability of the control circuit can be increased, i.e. control differences up to the NoiseCut limit will not be taken into account.

Example: NoiseCut = 5000 corresponds to a noise limit of 5 mV

Standard value: NoiseCut = 0 µV

The parameter setting is highly dependent on the setting of the control system. If a fast control has been set, i.e. a high E_Slope value, then the fluctuations can be reduced by increasing the NoiseCut value.

If the NoiseCut value is set too high, this leads to a permanent control deviation, i.e. the setpoint value set is not reached.

Procedure:a) observing the behaviour with the control system switched on: are the energy fluctuations greater than with the control system switched off?b) If statement (a) applies, increase NoiseCut by 1000 µVc) Observing the control behaviour: can a permanent control deviation be observed?d) Repeat steps (b-c) until the energy fluctuations are minimised and no permanent control deviation

occurs.

If the amplification is changed, the NoiseCut value has to be re-adjusted.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 07 - 06

7.2.6 Halt compensation

During a halt signal, i.e. when the beam shutter is open or, for a corresponding signal at the USER1 in-terface, the laser pulses are stopped. This causes the laser rod to cool down brings with it a change in the thermal lens effect. As a result, when pulsing is resumed after the halt, a collapse of the pulse energy usually occurs. This collapse can be reduced with the halt compensation.

How halt compensation worksDuring the halt signal, the lamp voltage is increased linearly. The amount of increase can be adjusted with the parameter IP 50 HaltComp. After the halt signal, the lamp voltage is reset to its original value by the control system.The halt compensation is only effective with the energy control system switched on. In general, the halt compensation can be switched off by setting IP 59 HaltComp to 0.Halt times up to 1 sec can be typically compensated.On the installation side it is assumed that a halt signal is available for the halt compensation.

Procedure:To achieve optimum settings, either the processing result after the halt is observed or the HaltComp adjustment program is used.To optimise the result, the parameters IP 59 HaltComp and IP 27 E_Slope have to be set. In general, good results are achieved if the energy collapses after the halt and the subsequent overshooting are about the same and less than 10%.The adjustment of the end mirror can influence the behaviour after the halt.Checking the correct setting of the process limits: after a halt of 30 sec the laser should go back to the correct operating value.

7.2.7 Messages during the control process

If the permissible tolerances are exceeded during a control process, then a warning message is displayed on the terminal.

Message Meaning Explanation

LWarn M28 Voltage at C-module not in setpoint range The charging voltage tolerance given in IP 30 is being exceeded

LWarn M30 Energy outside tolerance The energy control tolerance given in IP 26 is being exceeded

If these warnings are linked to the OK signal in IP 17, then this causes this signal to decay.


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 07 - 07

Possible causes and measures:

LWarn M30 Energy outside tolerance1) Normal condition: this warning can occur briefly during the control process in the event of: a control process after a halt control process during a drastic change of the setpoint energy2) Switch off the energy control system and check if the energy fluctuations are smaller than when the

energy control system is switched on.3) If point (2) applies, reduce the controller amplification (IP 27 E_slope) until the message does not ap-

pear any more.4) If point (2) does not apply, check the adjustment of the resonator and renew the flashlamp if neces-

sary. If these steps do not reduce the fluctuations, then increase IP 26 E_Control.

LWarn M28 Voltage at C-module not in the setpoint range1) Normal condition: this warning can occur briefly during the control process in the event of: a control process after a halt a control process during a drastic change of the setpoint energy2) If the warning remains up for a longer time, then the power limit of the charging unit has been ex-

ceeded. Measures to reduce the power: reduced the pulse length, pulse frequency or lamp voltage.

7.2.8 Aids for checking the control system

HaltComp auxiliary programThe HaltComp program is on CD 32.9510. The connection to the laser is via the RS 232.

Voltage and energy measuring outputsThe NLS from version 48 onwards has two analogue outputs which can also be used to check the control system.X5-10d setpoint value of the charging unitX5-10z laser pulse energy. Direct image of the ADC, influenced by IP 31 E_Ampl and by the range change-

over.

The laser pulse energy is measured every 5 ms in the case of frequencies above 200 Hz, otherwise at every laser pulse. The X5-10z signal is quicker than the RS 232 output as a result.


A COMPANY OF THE



8 Terminals and remote connection

86 . 0651 - 08 - 01

8 Terminals and remote connectionThe LASAG proprietary terminals are to be used for optimum operation of the lasers. A hand-held operat-ing terminal, a built-in terminal or a PC terminal are available as options.

The relevant diagrams and drawings can be found in chapter 10.

Table of contents

8.1 Technical data of hand-held terminal HT2 28.1.1 Brief description of hand-held terminal HT2 2

8.2 Technical data of the built-in terminal ET1 38.2.1 Brief description of the built-in terminal 48.2.2 Installation instructions for ET1 58.2.3 ET external panel 8

8.3 Technical data of the PC terminals PCT1 and PCT2 9

8.4 Modem operation 108.4.1 Modem connections 108.4.2 Installation and cabling 128.4.2 Settings for modem transmission 148.4.4 Menu overview 178.4.5 Establishing a connection 198.4.6 Connection statuses 21


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 02

8.1 Technical data of hand-held terminal HT2

1. Hand-held terminal HT22. Connector for connecting to one of the laser's COM interfaces 3. Power supply cable4. Power supply plug, connection to X615. Fixing hook with retaining magnet6. Holding plate (optional)

The parts shown in the front view are described in the operator instructions.

8.1.1 Brief description of hand-held terminal HT2

Technical Data

Dimensions (without cable inlet): max. 186.6 x 105.8 x 80 mm (H x W x D)

Weight (minus cables, plugs): 0.46 kg

Connections: serial RS232 on 9-pin D-Sub

Housing: Polyamide, RAL 7021 grey black

Impact resistance: >7 Nm in accordance with DIN 50014

Power supply: +24 V DC / max. 200mA

Temperature range: 0...55 °C

Relative humidity: max. 90% non-condensing

Type of protection: IP 65

Keypad: 18 short-stroke keys, LED on 8 keys

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 01

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 02.indd

1

5

6

2

4

3


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 03

Display: LCD, 128 x 64 pixels, monochrome backlighting and contrast adjustable

Loudspeaker: sound generator

Cable length: 3, 5 or 10 m (without power supply cable)

Length of power supply cable: 0.3 m

Performance features

Processor: INTEL i386EX, 25MHz

EEPROM: 2 MByte SMD Flash-ROM

static RAM: 128 KByte SMD SRAM, battery buffered

dynamic RAM: 2 MByte SMD DRAM

Operating system: Technosoftware IDOS

8.2 Technical data of the built-in terminal ET1

1. CPU sub-assembly2. Power supply plug3. RS232 connector, 2 in total4. Fixing holes (foil intact)5. Connector point for grounding connection6. Front plate7. Housing for display and keyboard

The parts shown in the front view are described in the operator instructions.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 02

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 03.indd

4

1

8

4

7

2

5


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 04

8.2.1 Brief description of the built-in terminal

Technical Data

Dimensions (without cable inlet): max. 129 x 312 x 87 mm (H x W x D)

Weight (minus cables, plugs): 1.71 kg

Connections: COM1, COM2, serial RS232 on 9-pin D-Subnot electrically disconnected

Housing: sheet steel, industrial grade, EMC compatible > 7 Nm

Power supply: +24 V DC / max. 1A

Temperature range: 0...55 °C

Relative humidity: 85% non condensing

Keypad: 24 short-stroke keys, LED on 6 keys

Display: Colour LCD STN backlit, ¼ VGA,Resolution of 320 x 240 pixels

Performance features

Processor: INTEL i386EX, 25MHz

EEPROM: 1 MByte DIL Flash-ROM

static RAM: 256 KByte SMD SRAM, battery buffered

dynamic RAM: 1 MByte SMD DRAM

Bus system/standard: PC104i

Operating system: Technosoftware IDOS


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 05

8.2.2 Installation instructions for ET1

It is frequently desirable and / or necessary to integrate the laser's operating unit into an (existing) operat-ing panel. This means that the overview of the various operating equipment is improved and the instal-lation can be centrally controlled.

Some suggestions for integrating the ET1 terminal into an operating panel are given below.

8.2.2.1 Installation from above

The simplest way of installing the terminal is to insert the ET1 into a prepared aperture from above. The dimensions of the necessary aperture are given in diagram 32.1904-02-01.Prior to installing the fixing screws, holes must be made in the front of the terminal with a sharp object. For cosmetic reasons Allen screws with round heads are recommended (detail A). To achieve a tighter fit, a seal can be installed between the base and front plates of the terminal.The advantage of this method of installation is the the fact that the work on the base plate is limited to the cut-out and the four holes. A disadvantage is that the terminal can only be fixed to the base plate at four points.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 03

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 05.indd

GrundplatteGround plate

GrundplatteGround plate

EinbauterminalBuilt-in terminal

Terminal A


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 06

8.2.2.2 Installation from below

There are several ways of fixing the terminal in place when it is installed from below. If a good seal if required between the terminal and base plate, then it is recommended tat the terminal is held against the base plate by means of clamps. If a seal is installed as well and the clamps are spaced at regular distances, this provides very good protection against the ingress of foreign matter. With this installation method too, the holes on the front plate can be included (detail C). A disadvantage when installing from below is the fact that the welded threaded bolts have to be attached to the plate to create the joint. The effort involved is greater than that required when installing from above, but a better seal is provided in this case.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 04

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 06.indd

B

C

DichtungGasket


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 0�

8.2.2.3 Adjusting to an existing aperture

If the ET1 is to be installed in an existing base plate, then the aperture may have to be adjusted. A cover plate is required to fix the terminal in place. It is attached to the existing base plate. The terminal itself is then fitted to the cover plate from below.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 05

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 07.indd

ET1GrundplatteGround plate

AbdeckplatteCovering plate


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 08

8.2.3 ET external panel

1. Cut-out for built-in terminal 2. Beam blocking indicator lamp3. Laser warning light4. Connection cable for system connector X50 (fed through)5. Connector for transmission of commands6. Emergency-off button

Technical Data

Dimensions: max. 131 x 466 x 212 mm (H x W x D)

Weight: 6.4 kg

Type of protection: IP 54

Housing: sheet steel, industrial grade, EMC compatible > 7 Nm

Colour: light grey, RAL 7040, patterned

Cable length: 6 m

Connections: 1 x RS232, 9-pin/male D-Sub

Customer-specific modifications are possible.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 06

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 08.indd

F3

F4

6

9

3

45

6

21

esc

12

3

45

78

0Ent

er

?

F1

F3

F5

F6


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 09

8.3 Technical data of the PC terminals PCT1 and PCT2

The laser can also be operated using a PC. The programs PCT1 and PCT2 are provided for this purpose. The most current program is PCT2 that must be used for all C-laser sources. PCT1 is used for certain drilling and cutting applications.

It is up to the customer to procure the computer. . Note that the device has been adapted to the working environment (dust, vibrations, light conditions, …).

The installation files, system requirements and an comprehensive operating manual are contained on the attached CD 32.9510.

The computer and the laser are connected to each other with null modem cable. Use a LASAG connect-ing cable in every case!

A free COM port is required on the laser for this.

Connector: RS232 interface, D-sub 9 to connect the connecting cable

Transmission protocol: bits per second 9600

data bits 8

Parity none

Stop bits 1

Protocol Xon/Xoff


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 10

8.4 Modem operation

LASAG lasers, which are equipped with a new laser control system (NLS), provide a new form of customer service. The laser can be conveniently remote controlled and serviced via a modem and a telephone con-nection. To take account of the conditions on site, various alternatives can be used to establish a connec-tion. Installation and operation are as easy as can be and are described in detail in these instructions.The built-in terminal (ET1), the PC terminal (PCT1) and the hand-held terminal (HT2) support the modem functionalities of the new laser control system consistently.If connecting via a modem, there are no restrictions on the operation of the laser in comparison with a terminal that is directly connected to the laser. The concepts of password protection, action groups and authorizations, which are already familiar to users, remain valid.Various protective measures have been provided to prevent unwanted or inadvertent connections from outside.

8.4.1 Modem connections

8.4.1.1 Situation plan

8.4.1.2 Explanation of terms used

Customer premises/side: customer premises (side) means that side of the connection where the modem is connected directly to the laser.

Service side: the location from which the laser is to be remotely operated or serviced. In normal circumstances the LASAG customer service or one of the authorised LASAG service partners is located on this side of the connection.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 07

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 10.indd

PCT1ET1HT2

- öffentliches Netz/Public network- internes Netz/Internal network- festverkabelung/Fixed cabling

PCT1ET1HT2

ModemKunde

Customer

ModemService

optional optional

KundenseitigCustomers side

Kunde/customer Service

ServiceseitigService side


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 11

The maximum distance for a connection using a RS232 interface depends on transmission speed and on the interference. The cable should not be more than 10 m. If necessary to operate or to service the laser over a greater distance, then a modem link can be used. Elaborate installations with signal amplifiers etc. are un-necessary. If such an installation is used, both connection sides are on the customer's premises. But in the description below it is assumed the remote connection is located at LASAG's premises.

Modem customer: the modem connected to a serial interface of the NLS is designated as the modem cus-tomer. Alternatively, the name Modem NLS can also be used.

Modem service: this modem is located on the customer serviced side, as the name suggests. This modem is directly connected to the operating terminal. This automatically identi-fies the connected device as a modem.

8.4.1.3 Acquisition of the modem

The modem and the required cabling material should be purchased by the customer in the respective country. This is the only way to ensure that the country-specific standards and provisions of the telecommunications providers are complied with. But LASAG can provide a range of modems from various renowned manufactur-ers. The “Swiss” versions of the modems listed in this range have been tested and are ideally matched to the laser control system. Please contact the LASAG customer service to obtain the most up-to-date list.

8.4.1.4 Types of connections

There is a total of four possible ways of establishing a modem connection. Depending on the existing infra-structure (telephone exchange, telephones, etc.) not all of them are always available. The two sides have to agree in advance the alternative they decide on. The LASAG customer service will be pleased to assist in choosing a suitable alternative. The various types are described in brief below.

Type 1: direct dial from service to customerThe call comes from the service side (LASAG service). When the call gets through, the modem customer rings. If this is set to AA mode (AA-LED on modem), the modem responds automati-cally. If not, the modem can be set manually to AA or 1xAA during the ring tone.

Type 2: direct dial from customer to serviceThe connection is established by the modem-NLS. The customer calls up a LASAG service point. In doing so, the NLS modem is the sender (ATD) and the external modem the receiver. If this is set to AA, the connection is established automatically. Otherwise, the call has to be accepted manually.

Type 3: modem-to-modem transferFor this type of connection, a telephone must also be available at both ends apart from a modem. Telephone and modem must be connected to the same telephone connection. A call can be held initially using the speech connection. The connection is then transferred to the respective modem at each end.

Type 4: call through telephone exchange with transfer to modemThis solution is very useful if no direct dialling is possible. This is frequently the case in older tele-phone exchanges where a call has to be put through manually, in our case to the internal modem. The connection is established externally using the telephone. As soon as the modem's identifica-tion tone can be heard on the service side, the connection is transferred from the telephone to the modem. With this solution, the internal modem is the receiver and must be set to AA.

With all four solutions, it is absolutely necessary that the customer and the LASAG service engineer first call one another to agree on a connection solution.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 12

8.4.2 Installation and cabling

8.4.2.1 Customer side cabling

Operating terminal (customer side)

All terminals connected so far remain connected to the laser. This (one of these) terminal(s) is used to control the modem commands and monitor the connection conditions. Even if the laser is being remotely controlled, the local operating terminals remain fully functional. The NLS does not differentiate between whether it is operated through the modem or a local terminal.

Modem (customer side modem)

A free serial interface on the laser is required for connecting the modem. It does not matter which one of the free COM ports is used. Connect the data cable supplied with the modem to a free COM interface and make a note of the one used. The interface used will need to be configured later. This is done in the integrator parameters. More on this later. The telephone cable that comes with the modem is connected to the back of the modem and the other end to the telephone socket.

Telephone (optional)

For connection solution 3: modem-to-modem transfer, a telephone is required. It must be connected to the same connection as the modem. If only a single connection socket is available, then you need an adapter (TT83/87).

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 08

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 12.indd

Telefon (optional)Telephone (optional)

TelefonanschlussTelephone connection

TelefonkabelTelephone cable

DatenkabelData cable

BedienterminalOperating terminal

ModemKunde

Customer


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 13

8.4.2.2 Service side cabling

This section only concerns you if you want to operate your laser yourself by means of a modem connec-tion. This may be the case if distance between the laser and the operating terminal is too great for the connection via the RS232 port.The modem is connected directly to the operating terminal on the service side. All three LASAG operating terminals, HT2, ET1 and PCT1, can be connected directly to the modem. So you do not need any special software. The connected terminal automatically recognises that a modem has been connected. Because there is still no connection with the laser even after the modem has been connected, all fields not used to operate the modem are inactive and red. It is not until a successful connection has been made that the current laser parameters appear in the fields and the operating fields change to green. It is assumed, of course, that the action group is not blocked by a local terminal and that the necessary password level has been awarded.

The only difference from the cabling on the customer's side is the connection to the operating terminal instead of to the laser. The data cable is connected to a serial COM interface on the PC. The drivers sup-plied when the modem was purchased do not have to be installed.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 09

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 13.indd

ModemService

Telefon (optional)Telephone (optional)

BedienterminalOperating terminal(PCT1, ET1, HT2)

DatenkabelData cable


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 14

8.4.2 Settings for modem transmission

After some general information about the modem connection we now come to the required settings. Here too there is a difference in the settings between those on the customer side and those on the service side. Many settings depend on the type of modem used in each case. If you are using a modem suggested by LASAG, then you automatically also receive the compatible settings.

8.4.3.1 Customer side

All settings relating to the modem customer are contained in the integrator and modem parameters. These settings were made when the unit was delivered.

Integrator parameters

As already mentioned, the modem is connected to a free COM interface on the laser. The control system still has to be informed which interface exactly the modem has been connected to. This is done in the integrator parameters.

PCT1, ET1 HT2

The laser's serial interfaces are through-numbered for this purpose. If, for example, the modem is con-nected to “COM2” interface, then the parameter 03 COM2 is selected and “modem1” selected from it. The baud rate of the interface can be left set to “9600” baud.

Modem parameters

Settings specific to the modem are made in the modem parameters.

PCT1, ET1 HT2

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 10

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 14.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 10

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 14.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 11

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 14.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 11

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 14.indd


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 15

The AT command set is the de facto standard which defines the commands that allow the modem to be controlled in command mode. The name comes from the fact that each command is prefixed with AT prefix.The original AT command set is standardised and has been adopted by all modem manufacturers. But every manufacturer expands the command set with this own commands. This extended command set is not standardised in any way.For this reason, there is the facility in the modem parameters to adjust the commands of the most impor-tant modem actions.The “AT” prefix is not entered in the modem parameters.

Parameter Description Default value

01 Init Cmd 0-15 The first 16 characters of the modem initialising string. E0V1S7=30

02 Init Cmd 16-31 Space for 16 more characters for the initialising string

09 Dial prefix Command for establishing a connection as sender. D

11 Hangup Cmd Command to break off a connection H0

12 Answer Cmd Settings to determine how many rings should sound be-fore the modem customer accepts the call in AA mode

S0=2

17 Telephone No. Telephone number to be dialled by the modem without dial prefix. Like in the Init-string, all ASCII characters are al-lowed. Spaces are skipped, a “zero” character means the end of the string

033 222 45 22

24 Dialling mode Determines whether the modem is to use tone dialling (1) or pulse dialling (0).

Tone frequency

25 Answer Determines whether the modem continually answers in-coming calls automatically (Yes) or does not answer them (N0) or answers only once (1x).

No

26 Timeout Gives the time in seconds within which the modem has to respond to a command. If it does not answer, the error code 127 ModemxErr is issued.

30

27 Password Reserved for a possible password that may be required to allow an external user to sign on.

-

32 Modem type For later use. Is used for the complete parametrisation of a modem in accordance with a pre-defined type list.0=All parameters are adopted unchanged1=Hayes compatible modem

-


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 16

8.4.3.2 Service side

PCT1, ET1 HT2

Parameter Description Default value

07 Telephone No. Customer's telephone number. <No. of the customer>

09 Auto answer Determines whether the modem is to accept incom-ing calls automatically or not.- Automatic- No

No

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 16.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 12

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 16.indd


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 1�

8.4.4 Menu overview

All the menus used to operate the modem-customer and the modem-service are presented in this sec-tion. All the required commands can be accessed within a menu for the customer side and the service side.

8.4.4.1 Customer side

PC terminal, built-in terminal

Auto answer

Accept call

Reset modem (missing on illustration)

Break off connection

Modem number

Establish connection

Modem status

Hand-held terminal HT2

All commands of the PC terminal and built-in terminal are also available for the HT2. Only the representation is different because of he smaller display.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 13

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 17.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 13

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 17.indd


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 18

8.4.4.2 Service side

PC terminal, built-in terminal

Auto answer

Break off connection

Accept call as sender or receiver

Number to be calledEstablish connection

Hand-held terminal HT2

All parameters of the PC terminal and built-in ter-minal are also available for the HT2.

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 14

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 18.indd

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

86.0650 08 14

01.10.07 CM

00-00-00

00.00.07 CM


86.0650 08 18.indd


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 19

8.4.5 Establishing a connection

With all four solutions it is assumed that the laser and the modem have been correctly connected and configured. Both the laser and the two modems are switched on.On the customer's side, the 3 Setup menu should be opened. All commands to establish a modem con-nection are contained on this menu page. On the service side the 8 Extras menu must be opened.

8.4.5.1 Connection establishment, type 1 (LASAG calls customer)

Customer: initialise the modem

To do this, select the field 95 Reset. The modem is now initialised with the value indicated in the modem parameters. After successful initialisation the status value 128 Idle is displayed.

Customer: set the modem to auto-answer mode

Select the field 8 auto answer. You may have to click on this field several times. The display cycles be-tween no AA to always AA and 1x AA

Depending on the settings made in the modem parameters, the modem is already in this mode after ini-tialisation. The establishment of the external call can now start

Service: checks the telephone number in field 07 Phone number

Service: selects the field 101 Dial

On the customer side, the modem now rings and ringing is displayed in the status field. If a telephone is also connected, it also rings. Do not lift the handset. After two rings the modem automatically answers the call. The modem status changes to: 1 CONNECT and the LED CD (carrier detect) on the modem lights up.

8.4.5.2 Connection establishment, type 2 (customer calls LASAG)

Inform the LASAG customer service in advance so that it can ideally prepare for your call.



Customer: Break off the connection

Select the field 91 Dial. While the connection is being established, the message 129 Dial is displayed in the modem status field.The connection is now established from the laser side. As soon as it is established, the message 1 CONNECT appears in the status field and the LED CD (carrier detect) on the modem lights up.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 20

8.4.5.3 Connection establishment, type 3 (transfer to modem)

The modem must be on the same connection as the telephone used.

The customer and LASAG talk to each other over the telephone. It is not important who made the call. Both sides now have to transfer the connection from telephone to modem simultaneously.

Service: transfer by means of field 103 Take over TxCustomer: selects 'Take over connection' with 92 Take over.

As soon as the connection has been taken over, the message “1 CONNECT” is displayed and the status field and the modem's LED CD lights up.

Service, customer: replace the handset

Please note that the connection cannot be transferred back to the telephone any more.

8.4.5.4 Connection establishment, type 4 (telephone call to customer modem)



Customer: switch to auto-answer

Select the field 8 auto answer. You may have to click on this field several times. The display cycles be-tween no AA to always AA and 1x AA.

Service: call via telephone

The LASAG customer service calls the customer's telephone exchange and has itself connected to the modem. The modem begins to ring and the call is answered by the modem. As soon as the signal noise of the modem can be heard on the service side, the connection can be transferred to the modem.

Service: transfer of the connection to the modem with 103 Take over Tx

The takeover of the connection must be done by the sender (Tx). To this end, the field 103 Take over Tx must be selected.


A COMPANY OF THE


A COMPANY OF THE




86 . 0651 - 08 - 21

8.4.5.5 Breaking off the connection

If the modem connection is to be broken off, this can be done both on the customer side and on the service side.

Breaking off on the customer side

Customer: hang up using field 93 Hang up

Optionally, the connection can also be broken off with Reset While the call is being disconnected, the message 131 Hang up appears in the status field.

No input is necessary on the service side. After the connection has been disconnected, the fields on the service side terminal change to red and the laser parameters are replaced by question marks. Com-mands to the modem continue to be possible.

Breaking off on the service side

Service: breaking off the connection using the field 104 Hang up.

No actions are required on the customer side. If no further connections are to be established, the modem can now be switched off. If a new connection is to be established, the modem must first be re-initialised using the Reset field.

8.4.6 Connection statuses

When establishing a modem connection, various statuses can be assumed. But the current status is always displayed in the modem status field. Connection errors are defined as statuses.

The table below provides and overview of the possible connection status. Only one status can be valid at any one time.

Status No. Abbreviated text Description

1 CONNECT The carrier signal was recognised. The connection is established. Additional indication by means of the LED CD (carrier detect) on the modem.

2 RING Incoming call.

3 NO CARRIER No carrier signal present or connection interrupted.

4 ERROR Error in the modem.

6 NO DIALTONE No dialling tone

7 BUSY The telephone line is engaged.

8 NO ANSWER Call not answered.

126 Time out No response to the modem command within the time limit indicated in the modem parameters.

127 Modem NOK The modem is not ready.

128 Idle Modem is ready to accept a call or to establish a connection itself.

129 Dial Dialling is in progress and an attempt is being made to establish a connection.

131 Hang up The connection is broken off.

Integration instructions Laser sources with NLS

9 Diagrams of mains connection and user interfaces

9 Diagrams of mains connections and user interfaces

List of contents

Mains connection Diagram of mains connection 13.0277-16-01/02

Emergency-off Emergency-off diagram 13.0277-17-01/03

X50 System SYSTEM X50 plugs diagram 13.0277-05-01/03

X51 USER1 X51/USER1 plug diagram 13.0277-06-01/03 Synchronisation of several lasers 13.0277-14-01

X51/52 USER2A USER2A diagram 13.0277-07-01


X51/52 USER2B USER3B diagram 13.0277-07-04

X51/52 USER4A USER4A diagram 13.0277-07-05 USER4A layout diagram 32.1942-06-01 USER4A testbox diagram 32.1942-91-01 Power-on procedure 32.1942-07-01/05


X51/52 USER6 USER6 diagram 34.1075-02-01/03 USER6 diagram 34.1075-03-01/05

X51/52 USER9A Fast Shutter FSH04 diagram 32.2085-02-01

X54 OEM KLS 246 OEM, external complete operating panel 32.1897-01-01 FLS N OEM, external complete operating panel 32.2077-01-01 FLS CL OEM, external complete operating panel 32.2078-01-01

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S DS: 90-10-13 © Lasag AG, Thun, 10.01.08 CM 86 . 0651 - 09 - 01









Schematic diagram connector X51 / USER1

Variante: Beschaltung ab Laserversorgung gespiesenAchtung: Störfestigkeit vermindert

Alternative: Circuit supplied by the laser power supplyAttention: Noise immunity reduced

Bei Nichtgebrauch mit GND-EXT (Nr. 11) verbinden

Beschaltung einesLaserausganges

81)

Schema Stecker X51 / USER1

Laserversorgungen mit NLSPower supplies with NLS

31.01.2000 Zw

Connect to GND-EXT (Nr. 11) if not used

Nicht unterstützt durch SW-V80

DS 49-10-02, 90-10-13

Bezeichnung

Titela

Das

Urhe

berre

cht a

n di

esen

Zei

chnu

ngen

und

alle

n Be

ilage

n,di

e de

m E

mpf

änge

r per

sönl

ich a

nver

traut

sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

r-ze

it un

sere

r Firm

a. O

hne

unse

re s

chrif

tlich

e G

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

nsie

nich

t kop

iert

oder

ver

vielfä

ltigt,

auch

nie

mal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

b02.11.98 Zw

1)

2)

Circuit for alaser output

10.05.04 Zwc d 09.05.06 Zw

Imax. = 2A! 2412

201)

10

1122

23

219

Beschaltung einesLasereinganges

Circuit for alaser input

18

19

176

7

516

1

14

15

13

4

3

2

HL8 X5/16d

Artikelnummer Dok. Blatt

25.05.98 Zw

13.0277-06-01

fe 21.02.07 Zw

gepr.

Bl.zahlges.

gez.Verw.Service

+24V24GND12

20 TPFPWPNCNCGND-EXT+24V-EXT

10

1122

23

219

LASAG

+24VF7

X3/08b

X5/16zX5/14dX5/14z

X5/32X5/30

X51

LL0LL1RCASOOKFINP1

18

19

176

7

516 GVALV 2)

1 RCRFLP0LP1SOCPBPR

14

15

13

4

3

2

X81 C05

X4/12dX4/12zX4/18dX4/18zX4/20dX4/20z

X4/10z

X4/02d

X4/04dX4/04zX4/08dX4/08zX4/10d

X4/02z

NLS


Bei Nichtgebrauch mit GND-EXT (Nr. 11) verbinden

Empfolene Variante: Beschaltung extern gespiesen

Recommended Alternative: Circuit supplied externally

201)



Connect to GND-EXT (Nr. 11) if not used

10.05.04 Zw


DS 49-10-02, 90-10-13

Bezeichnung

Titela

Das

Urhe

berre

cht a

n di

esen

Zei

chnu

ngen

und

alle

n Be

ilage

n,di

e de

m E

mpf

änge

r per

sönl

ich a

nver

traut

sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

r-ze

it un

sere

r Firm

a. O

hne

unse

re s

chrif

tlich

e G

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

nsie

nich

t kop

iert

oder

ver

vielfä

ltigt,

auch

nie

mal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

b02.11.98 Zw

1)

2)

Circuit for alaser output

09.05.06 Zwc d 21.02.07 Zw

+24V-Versorgung+24V supply

2412

10

1122

23

219

Beschaltung einesLasereinganges

Beschaltung einesLaserausganges

Circuit for alaser input

1

18

19

176

7

8

5

1)

16

14

15

13

4

3

2

+24V

GN

D

20 TP X5/16z


25.05.98 Zw

13.0277-06-02

fe

gepr.

Bl.zahlges.

gez.Verw.Service

+24V24

FPWPNCNCGND-EXT+24V-EXTGND12

10

1122

23

219

LASAG

+24VF7

X5/14dX5/14z

X3/08b

X5/32X5/30

1 RC

X51

LL0LL1RCASOOKFINP1HL

18

19

176

7

8

5

RFLP0LP1SOCPBPRGVALV16

14

15

13

4

3

2

2)

X81 C05

X4/02d

X4/12dX4/12zX4/18dX4/18zX4/20dX4/20zX5/16d

X4/04dX4/04zX4/08dX4/08zX4/10dX4/10z

X4/02z

NLS

Beschaltung im Auslieferzustand

Wiring in delivery condition


8




DS 49-10-02, 90-10-1321.02.07 Zw

Bezeichnung

Titela

Das

Urhe

berre

cht a

n di

esen

Zei

chnu

ngen

und

alle

n Be

ilage

n,di

e de

m E

mpf

änge

r per

sönl

ich a

nver

traut

sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

r-ze

it un

sere

r Firm

a. O

hne

unse

re s

chrif

tlich

e G

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

nsie

nich

t kop

iert

oder

ver

vielfä

ltigt,

auch

nie

mal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

b10.05.04 Zw

2)

c d

2412

20

10

1122

23

219

18

19

176

7

516

1

14

15

13

4

3

2

HL8 X5/16d


10.07.00 Zw

13.0277-06-03

fe Verw.

gepr.

Bl.zahlges.

gez.

Service

+24V24GND12

20 TPFPWPNCNCGND-EXT+24V-EXT

10

1122

23

219

LASAG

+24VF7

X3/08b

X5/16zX5/14dX5/14z

X5/32X5/30

X51

LL0LL1RCASOOKFINP1

18

19

176

7

5GVALV16 2)

1 RCRFLP0LP1SOCPBPR

14

15

13

4

3

2

X81 C05

X4/12dX4/12zX4/18dX4/18zX4/20dX4/20z

X4/10z

X4/02d

X4/04dX4/04zX4/08dX4/08zX4/10d

X4/02z

NLS/96








Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

32.1942 07 01

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS49-10-11, 90-10-13

00.00.07 CM

Netz-Ein ProzedurPower-On Procedure

Option USER4A

86.0650 09 01.indd

Netz-Ein ProzedurPower-On Procedure

Wischimpuls (ca. 2 sec.)an «Laser-Ein»

Switch-on/off (~2 sec.)the «Laser-on»

Netz-Ein Fehler

Power-on Failure

Warten bisKühlung = Ein

Waiting for cooling = on(LSTAT0 = 1)

Fehler:Failure:

Cooling not runningLaser not ready

Laser = ready

10 sec abgelaufen

10 sec later

Kühlung einschalten

Switch-on cooling

LSTAT0 = 1

(Ix.0 = 1)

Netz = Ein?

Power = On? (Ix3 = 1) N J

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

32.1942 07 02

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS49-10-11, 90-10-13

00.00.07 CM

Kühlung-Ein ProzedurCooling-On Procedure

Option USER4A

86.0650 09 01.indd

Kühlung-Ein ProzedurCooling-On Procedure



(Ox.0)

Kühlung nichteingeschaltet

Coolingswitched-off

Warten biswaiting forLSTAT0 = 1

(Ix.0 = 1)

Fehler:Failure:

Cooling not running

Kühlung läuft

Cooling is running

Kühlung einschalten

Switch-on cooling

LSTAT0 = 1

(Ix.0 = 1)

10 sec abgelaufen

10 sec later

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

32.1942 07 03

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS49-10-11, 90-10-13

00.00.07 CM

Laser-Ein ProzedurLaser-On Procedure

Option USER4A

86.0650 09 01.indd

Laser-Ein ProzedurLaser-On Procedure



(Ox.0)

Laser ready

Warten bisWaiting for

OK = 1(Ix.1 = 1)

Fehler:Failure:

Laser not ready

Laser = active

Laser einschalten

Switch-on laser

OK = 1

(Ix.1 = 1)

10 sec abgelaufen

10 sec later

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

32.1942 07 04

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS49-10-11, 90-10-13

00.00.07 CM

Laser-Aus ProzedurLaser-Off Procedure

Option USER4A

86.0650 09 01.indd

Laser-Aus ProzedurLaser-Off Procedure

Wischimpuls (ca. 2 sec.)an «LOFF»

Switch-on/off (~2 sec.)the «LOFF-signal»

(Ox.1)

Laser active

Warten bisWaiting for

OK = 0(Ix.1 = 0)

Fehler:Failure:

USER3B not accessibleCheck action-groups

Laser = standby(Kühlung abh. von

Cooling depends onIP Nr. 16

«LOFFCool Coupl)»

Laser ausschalten

Switch-off laser

OK = 1

(Ix.1 = 1)

10 sec abgelaufen

10 sec later

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

1:1

wird verwendet für

Datei Typ: ai

32.1942 07 05

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS

02.06.99 FIS49-10-11, 90-10-13

00.00.07 CM

Kühlung-Aus ProzedurCooling-Off Procedure

Option USER4A

86.0650 09 01.indd

Kühlung-Aus ProzedurCooling-Off Procedure

Wischimpuls (ca. 2 sec.)an «LOFF»

Switch-on/off (~2 sec.)the «LOFF-signal»

(Ox.1)

Laser standby,

Cooling is running

Warten bisWaiting forLSTAT0 = 0

(Ix.0 = 0)

Fehler:Failure:

USER3B not accessibleCheck action-groups

Kühlung = aus

Cooling = off

Kühlung ausschalten

Switch-off cooling

LSTAT0 = 0

(Ix.0 = 0)

10 sec abgelaufen

10 sec later



ÿÿ

ChristianWissing

Digital unterschrieben von ChristianWissingDN: cn=Christian Wissing, c=CH,o=LASAG AG, ou=Entwicklung,[email protected]: Ich bestätige die Richtigkeit undIntegrität dieses DokumentsDatum: 2007.01.30 16:58:04 +01'00'

ÿÿ

ChristianWissing



ÿÿ

ChristianWissing


ÿÿ

ChristianWissing


ÿÿ

ChristianWissing


ÿÿ

ChristianWissing


ÿÿ

ChristianWissing

Digital unterschrieben von ChristianWissingDN: cn=Christian Wissing, c=CH,o=LASAG AG, ou=Entwicklung,[email protected]: Ich bestätige die Richtigkeitund Integrität dieses DokumentsDatum: 2007.01.31 09:17:45 +01'00'




Integration Instructions Laser sources with NLS

10 Diagrams of terminals

10 Diagrams of terminals

List of Contents

Connection diagram Hand-held terminal HT2 32.1937-02-01

General drawing Built-in terminal ET1 32.1904-01-01

Section of Built-in terminal ET1 32.1904-02-01

External panel Built-in terminal ET1 32.1919-01-01

External panel diagram Built-in terminal ET1 32.1919-02-01

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S DS: 90-10-13 © Lasag AG, Thun, 10.01.08 CM 86 . 0651 - 10 - 01


49-10-08, 90-10-13

Übersichtszeichnung ET1General drawing ET1

32.1904-01-01BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

1:1

Datei Typ: .ai

wird verwendet für

00.00.07 CM

21.01.99FP

.indd


92 m

m

Tiefe 90 mmDepht 90 mm

20 m

m

5 mm

3 mm

74 mm

312 mm

21 mm122 mm

302 mm

129

mm

19 m

m

20 mm 41 mm

12 m

m89

mm

F1

F2

Esc

F3

F4

F5

F6 Del Enter

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

?

49-10-08, 90-10-13

Ausschnitt für ET1Cut-out for ET1

32.1904-02-01BlattDok



Werkstoff

c

g

b

f

a

eErsatz für

d

h

Masstab

Freigegeben

Geprüft

Gezeichnet

Gewinde 6H/6g


DS


Artikelnummer

The

Cop

yrig

ht fo

r all

of th

e dr

awin

gs a

nd re

late

d ap

pend

ages

, wic

h ha

ve b

een

hand

ed o

ver

to th

e re

cipi

ent p

erso

nally

, rem

ain

vest

ed in

our

com

pany

at a

ll tim

es. T

he s

ame

may

not

be

copi

ed o

r rep

licat

ed in

any

way

in w

hole

or i

n pa

rt w

ithou

t our

prio

r con

sent

in w

ritin

g.Fu

rther

mor

e, th

ey m

ay n

ot b

e m

ade

avai

labl

e or

oth

erw

ise

disc

lose

d to

any

third

par

ty.

© L

AS

AG

LTD

, Thu

n

Das

Urh

eber

rech

t an

dies

en Z

eich

nung

en u

nd a

llen

Bei

lage

n, d

ie d

em E

mpf

änge

rpe

rsön

lich

anve

rtrau

t sin

d, v

erbl

eibt

jede

rzei

t uns

erer

Firm

a. O

hne

schr

iftlic

heG

eneh

mig

ung

dürfe

n si

e ni

cht k

opie

rt, v

ervi

elfä

ltigt

, auc

h ni

emal

s dr

itten

Per

sone

nm

itget

eilt

oder

zug

ängl

ich

gem

acht

wer

den.

© L

AS

AG

AG

, Thu

n

Abw

eich

unge

n fü

r Mas

se o

hne

Tole

ranz

anga

ben

bis

30 m

m

± 0,

1 m

m

über

30

mm

bis

120

mm

± 0,

15 m

m

über

120

mm

bis

315

mm

± 0,

2 m

m

über

315

mm

bis

1000

mm

± 0,

3 m

m

über

100

0 m

mbi

s 20

00 m

m

± 0,

5 m

m

1:1

Datei Typ: .ai

wird verwendet für

00.00.07 CM

02.02.00 WI

.indd

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

?F1

F2

Esc

F3

F4

F5

F6 Del Enter


89 m

m

293 mm 4.5 mm

114

mm

293 mm

3 mm

4.5 mm

12.5

mm

12.5

mm

9.5 mm7.

5 m

m

Einbauterminal ET1 im Pultgehäuse Built-in terminal ET1 in external panel

A COMPANY OF THE

I N D U S T R I A L - L A S E R S DS: 49-10-08, 90-10-13 © Lasag AG, Thun, 12.04.00 CM 32 . 1919 - 01 - 01


Documents

D:\Lasag Cd자료\Laser Sources Release 0102-60020 (T)\Integrator\860651 Dok En